Route Specifications 2011 – London North Eastern

Home , Arthington Viaduct, Beighton Junction, Cambridge Line, Durham Coast Line, Greatham railway station, Level junction

Network Rail Route Specifications 2011 – London North Eastern

“It’s an enormous national industry – surely one of the UK’s biggest.”* More people are using the railways today than at any time since the 1920s – some four million a day. Over the next few years we are investing in expanding and growing the railway, and developing plans for the future.

*Passenger comment, May 2011

Helping Britain run better 2014-2019 will see a financially sustainable railway with more seats, shorter journey times and greater passenger satisfaction – we’ve just published an industry plan for the five years to 2019 mapping out what we think needs to be done to deliver a better, more sustainable rail network. Contents

SRS G.01 - King's Cross – Peterborough...... 2 SRS G.02 - Moorgate Branch...... 11 SRS G.03 - Hertford Loop...... 15 SRS G.04 - Hitchin - Cambridge...... 19 SRS G.05 - Peterborough - Doncaster...... 23 SRS G.06 - Doncaster - Holbeck West Junction ...... 29 SRS G.07 - Doncaster - Colton Junction...... 33 SRS G.08 - Colton Junction - Northallerton ...... 37 SRS G.09 - Northallerton - Newcastle...... 41 SRS G.10 - Newcastle - Border...... 45 SRS G.13 - Newcastle – Carlisle...... 49 SRS G.14 - Darlington - Bishop Auckland ...... 53 SRS G.15 - Middlesbrough – Whitby ...... 56 SRS G.16 - Northallerton - Stockton Cut Junction...... 60 SRS G.17 - Stockton Cut Junction - Newcastle...... 64 SRS G.18 - Darlington - Eaglescliffe South Junction...... 69 SRS G.19 - Stockton Cut Junction - Saltburn ...... 72 SRS G.20 - Doncaster – Lincoln...... 77 SRS G.21 - Newark - Wrawby Junction...... 81 SRS G.22 - Gainsborough - Wrawby Junction ...... 86 SRS G.23 - Lincoln - Werrington Junction ...... 89 SRS G.90 - Stillington Branch...... 93 SRS G.91 - Blyth & Tyne Network...... 96 SRS G.98 - Freight Trunk Routes ...... 108 SRS G.99 - Other Freight Lines...... 132 SRS H.01 Leeds – Holbeck Junction ...... 140 SRS H.02 Leeds – York (via Harrogate) ...... 145 SRS H.03 Leeds – Skipton / Ilkley...... 149 SRS H.04 Leeds – Halifax (via Bradford)...... 154 SRS H.05 North Transpennine: Leeds – Guide Bridge* ...... 159 SRS H.06 Leeds – Colton Junction...... 165 SRS H.07 Hull – Micklefield ...... 170 SRS H.08 Gilberdyke – Hatfield and Stainforth/Knottingley and Church Fenton – Moorthorpe...... 175 SRS H.09 Knottingley – Mirfield via Crofton Junction/Castleford and via Castleford Junction – Leeds West Junction/Whitwood ...... 181 SRS H.10 Manchester Victoria – Mirfield (via Rochdale)/Stalybridge* ...... 186 SRS H.11 Hull – Seamer ...... 192 SRS H.12 York – Scarborough...... 196 SRS H.13 Chesterfield – Swinton via Sheffield...... 199 SRS H.14 Swinton Junction – Brocklesby Junction...... 204 SRS H.15 South Kirkby Junction – Swinton Junction...... 210 SRS H.16 Sheffield – Gainsborough...... 215 SRS H.17 South Transpennine: Dore – Hazel Grove*...... 219 SRS H.18 Sheffield Meadowhall – Horbury Junction ...... 224 SRS H.19 Brocklesby Junction – Cleethorpes...... 228 SRS H.21 Barton-on-Humber Branch...... 236 SRS H.90 Immingham and Killingholme Docks...... 239 SRS H.91 Freight Through Routes* ...... 243 SRS H.98 Freight Trunk Routes* ...... 280 SRS H.99 Other Freight Routes*...... 319 SRS I.04 Worksop/Chesterfield – Nottingham* ...... 325 SRS I.08 Skegness – Grantham ...... 330 SRS I.99 Other Freight Lines* ...... 334 * Strategic Route Sections which interface with another Route

1 SRS G.01 - King's Cross - Peterborough

Route specification description

This SRS forms the southern section of the East Coast Main Line (ECML) and extends for 76¼ miles from London King’s Cross station to Peterborough. It comprises four tracks for most of its length, but widens to six tracks between Finsbury Park and Alexandra Palace, narrows to two tracks over the Welwyn Viaduct and through two tunnels north of Welwyn North station, and again narrows to three and then two tracks between Huntingdon and Fletton Junction. It is electrified (with 25kV OHL) along its whole length. It intersects with other routes at a number of locations, most notably with the North London Line at Copenhagen Junction and Harringay Junction, the Moorgate branch at Finsbury Park South Junctions, the Hertford loop at Wood Green North Junction and Langley Junction, and the Hitchin – Cambridge line at Hitchin Cambridge Junction. The route carries First Capital Connect (FCC) suburban services from King’s Cross and Moorgate to various destinations in Hertfordshire, Bedfordshire, Cambridgeshire and Norfolk, and long distance high speed (LDHS) services (operated by East Coast, Hull Trains and Grand Central) from King’s Cross to destinations in Yorkshire, the North East and Scotland.

In terms of passenger numbers, the most significant stations are King’s Cross, Finsbury Park, Stevenage, Peterborough, Hitchin and Welwyn Garden City. King’s Cross as a major London terminal forms a gateway to the many destinations served in a broadly north-easterly direction, and has 12 platforms, of which nine can accommodate both long-distance high-speed trains and suburban services, with a further three shorter platforms accommodating suburban trains only. There is also the facility to interchange to the Circle, Hammersmith & City, Metropolitan, Northern, Piccadilly and Victoria lines of the London Underground as well as with Eurostar, East Midlands and Thameslink services at the adjacent St Pancras International station. The main Victorian train shed at King’s Cross is a listed building and is currently the subject of

2 considerable refurbishment and enhancement work, including the creation of a new entrance/concourse area and improved interchange facilities.

Finsbury Park station has six platforms, serving trains originating from Moorgate via the Northern City line as well as suburban services from King’s Cross, whilst also allowing interchange to the Piccadilly and Victoria lines of London Underground which have their own four sub-surface platforms. Stevenage has four platforms, and accommodates outer suburban services from King’s Cross to Peterborough, Cambridge and King’s Lynn, along with some LDHS trains, and some inner suburban services from the Hertford Loop (G.03). Peterborough currently has five platforms, but work is being undertaken to increase this to seven. As well as marking the northernmost limit of outer suburban services, and providing a stop for many of East Coast’s LDHS trains, Peterborough also accommodates two regular east-west services (namely CrossCountry’s Birmingham to Cambridge/Stansted Airport services, and East Midlands Trains’ Liverpool to Norwich service) and less frequent local trains to Lincolnshire via Spalding and to Ipswich via Ely and Bury St Edmunds. Welwyn Garden City is the busiest of 11 stations serving FCC services only which have four through platforms, whilst Hitchin is the busiest of seven stations which have two through platforms. Hatfield has three through platforms, whilst Huntingdon has two through platforms and a south-facing turnback platform.

There are numerous operational, maintenance and freight facilities along the route, of which the most significant include the sidings at Ferme Park (between Harringay and Hornsey), FCC’s Hornsey Train Servicing Centre, the East Coast maintenance depot at Bounds Green, carriage sidings at Welwyn Garden City, a plant maintenance depot and engineers’ sidings at Hitchin and Nene carriage sidings, just south of Peterborough station. There are freight private sidings at Stevenage (Langley Junction) and Biggleswade together with various non-passenger sidings at Welwyn Garden City, Sandy, Little Barford, St. Neots, Huntingdon and Connington, most of which are either lightly used or unused at the present time. There is a connection to the heritage Nene Valley Railway at Fletton Junction. This SRS is characterised by its large number of tunnels, at Gasworks, Copenhagen, Wood Green, Barnet, Hadley Wood South, Hadley Wood North, Potters Bar, Welwyn South and Welwyn North. Their existence forms a significant factor influencing any proposal for changes in station location or track layout.

Following the introduction of ERTMS in 2019, the requirements for future growth and the ability of ERTMS to meet them will be reviewed.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN101: King’s Cross to Peterborough description

Section start King’s Cross Station

Section end Peterborough Station

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W9 (except for W8 W9/W10 (except for W9/W10 (except for W8 between Wood Green W8 between Wood between Wood Green Junction and Langley Green Junction and Junction and Langley Junction) Langley Junction) Junction)

Signals Track Circuit Block European Rail Traffic ERTMS ERTMS is due to be (TCB) Management System installed on this SRS in (ERTMS) 2019.

Speed Fast lines: Fast lines: Introduction of ERTMS Predominantly 125 Predominantly 125 and IEP may allow mph mph increase in linespeed with further Slow lines: Slow lines: infrastructure Predominantly 75 mph Predominantly 75 improvements mph, possible increase to 100mph

Electrification 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey King’s Cross to Peterborough Introduction of IEP coupled Introduction of IEP coupled and with implementation of with implementation of LDHS: 47 minutes typical infrastructure interventions infrastructure interventions can journey Suburban: 1 hour 18 minutes can be expected to provide be expected to provide some time some improvement improvement

4 Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number LDHS LDHS LDHS of trains 2 tph (3 peak) King’s Cross to 3 tph King’s Cross to 3 tph King’s Cross to per hour Newcastle/Scotland Newcastle/Scotland Newcastle/Scotland 1 tph King’s Cross to 2 tph (3 peak) King’s Cross to 3 tph King’s Cross to Leeds Newark/York Leeds 1 tph King’s Cross to Hull or 2 tph (3 peak) King’s Cross to 1 tph King’s Cross to Hull or Sunderland or Bradford Leeds Sunderland or Bradford Interchange 1 tph King’s Cross to Hull or Interchange 2 tph King’s Cross to Sunderland or Bradford 2 tph King’s Cross to Yorkshire (exact destination Interchange Yorkshire (exact destination t.b.c.) t.b.c.) Suburban Suburban 4 tph King’s Cross to 4 tph King’s Cross to Royston/Cambridge/King’s Suburban Royston/Cambridge/King’s Lynn 4 tph (7 peak) King’s Cross to Lynn 2 tph Thameslink Core to Royston/Cambridge/King’s 2 tph Thameslink Core to Cambridge Lynn Cambridge 3 tph ( peak) King’s Cross to 2 tph (6 peak) King’s Cross to 2 tph ( peak) King’s Cross to Peterborough Peterborough Peterborough 2tph Thameslink core - 3 tph (4 peak) Moorgate to 2tph Thameslink core - Peterborough Welwyn Garden City Peterborough 4 tph Thameslink Core to 2 tph (7 peak) Moorgate to 4 tph Thameslink Core to Welwyn Garden City Gordon Hill/Hertford North Welwyn Garden City 2 tph Moorgate to Welwyn 1 tph (2 peak) Moorgate to 2 tph Moorgate to Welwyn Garden City Stevenage/Letchworth Garden City 4 tph (8 peak) Moorgate to 4 tph (8 peak) Moorgate to Gordon Hill/Hertford North Gordon Hill/Hertford North 2 tph Moorgate to 2 tph Moorgate to Stevenage/Letchworth via Stevenage/Letchworth via Hertford North Hertford North

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 8 As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in Busiest section is trains per Strategic Freight Network the Strategic between Holme and day* plan Freight Network Fletton Junction plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

Supervised: 6 As determined by Level As determined by Automatic: 0 Crossing policy Level Crossing User: 14 policy

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation date

ECML Overhead Various improvements ECM1 2013 Better performance Under Line to OHL along line of and engineering construction Performance route access Improvement

Hitchin Renewal of interlocking ECM1, 2012 Maintain capability Under Interlocking SBR construction renewal/ resignalling

King’s Cross Increased station ECM1 2013 Increased station Under Station capacity, new capacity, new construction Development concourse, increased concourse, increased commercial commercial opportunities opportunities and additional 12 car platform

Thameslink Major works including ECM1 2015 Improved capacity and In development Programme revised track and performance and new signalling layouts and journey opportunities platform extensions plus increase in 12 car between King’s Cross operation of outer and Peterborough suburban services

Arlesey, Platform extensions at ECM1 2013 Increased capacity on Under Biggleswade & Arlesey, Biggleswade outer suburban construction Sandy Platform & Sandy (part of the services Extensions Thameslink Programme)

6 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation date

Peterborough New platform on the ECM1 2013 Increased capacity In development station western side of the and improved additional island station performance platform

Alexandra Additional southbound ECM1 2013 Increased capacity, Under Palace - platforms at Alexandra improved performance construction Finsbury Park Palace and Finsbury and reduced journey 3rd Up line Park and conversion of times project goods line from Alexandra Palace to Finsbury Park to passenger status

Hitchin grade Revised layout at ECM1, 2013 Increased capacity In development separation Hitchin Cambridge SBR and improved journey Junction taking the times, safety and Down Cambridge line performance trains over the ECML

Stevenage Refurbishment of ECM1 2013 Refurbishment of In development Station platforms (renewal of station Refurbishment copers, installation of tactiles, re-surfacing, concrete repairs to platform structure and any necessary drainage work arising from survey)

Finsbury Park – Provide increased ECM1 2014 Improved capacity, Under Alexandra linespeeds performance and construction Palace Down operational flexibility Slow 2 upgrade

ECML South Gauge clearance on ECM1 2014 To accommodate the In development (W10 Route the ECML and carriage of deep sea Clearances) connecting routes container traffic on the ECML and connecting routes

ECML Slow Line Linespeed increases ECM1 2014 Improvements to In development LSIs (Hitchin to on ECML slow lines journey times, route Huntington) capacity and performance

7 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation date

Peterborough Additional platform on ECM1 2014 Reduction of the time In development Platform 3U Up Fast line (for LDHS penalty for a services) Peterborough stop in Up Fast services

Holme Lode Full renewal of ECM1 2014 Renewal of In development MCB(CCTV) MCB(CCTV) level MCB(CCTV) level Renewal crossing crossing

Hadley Wood Refurbishment of ECM1 2014 Refurbishment of In development Station platforms (resurfacing, station and footbridge Refurbishment renewal of copers and tactiles, white lining and essential repairs to platform riser walls), renewal of lighting, strengthening and refurbishment of footbridge

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Harringay Refurbishment of ECM1 CP5 Refurbishment of In development Station platforms station Refurbishment (resurfacing, renewal of copers and tactiles, white lining and essential repairs to platform riser walls)

Bounds Green Refurbishment of ECM1, CP5 Refurbishment of In development LMD overhead cranes, HDB maintenance depot Refurbishment main shed doors, roof covering and guttering to main shed

8 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

St. Pancras Provide SPC1, 2016 New route for Part of In development International to connection from ECM1, cross-London Thameslink Finsbury Park Thameslink core MCL traffic Programme Slow Line at St. Pancras to ECML at Finsbury Park

Bounds Green Resignalling & ECM1, 2017 Signalling renewals In development North interlocking HDB Resignalling renewal

ECML Inner Upgrading AC HDB, 2019 Provision of extra In development Suburban traction power ECM1 peak capacity on Capacity supply, some the Welwyn (Stevenage & resignalling of the Garden City and Gordon Hill) Hertford Loop, & Hertford North to improved turnback Moorgate services facilities at Stevenage & Gordon Hill

Alconbury Connection to ECM1 2018 New freight facility In development Freight proposed freight Terminal terminal

Huntingdon – 4-Tracking of the ECM1 2018 Improved capacity In development Fletton 4- ECML between and performance in Tracking Huntingdon and the Hitchin to Fletton Junction Peterborough corridor

Finsbury Park Renewal of S&C ECM1 2019 Renewal of S&C In development S&C

King’s Cross Renewal of S&C ECM1 2019 Renewal of S&C In development Station S&C

Connington Full renewal of ECM1 2019 Renewal of In development MCB(CCTV) MCB(CCTV) MCB(CCTV) level Renewal level crossing crossing

Everton Interlocking ECM1 2019 Interlocking In development Resignalling renewal and renewal and resignalling resignalling

9 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

IEP Infrastructure ECM1 2019 Ability to In development development/ works to accommodate IEP enabling works accommodate services operation of IEP rolling stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

10 SRS G.02 - Moorgate Branch

Route specification description

The Moorgate branch (also known as the Northern City Line) extends for 3½ miles from Moorgate station to Finsbury Park South Junctions, where it joins the East Coast Main Line (SRS G.01). It carries frequent inner suburban commuter services from Monday to Friday. It is electrified with third rail DC from Moorgate to Drayton Park, and with 25kV OHL from Drayton Park to Finsbury Park.

It is double track along its whole length, and contains five stations (including Moorgate), all of which have two platforms serving the Moorgate Branch. There are eight platforms in total at Highbury & Islington station, facilitating both an easy interchange with the London Underground Victoria Line, and interchange with London Overground services operating on the North London Line (SRS E.03). Moorgate station has a total of ten platforms (of which the two formerly serving Thameslink are disused), serving the Circle, Hammersmith & City, Metropolitan, and Northern Lines of London Underground (LUL), as well as the two on the Moorgate branch. It is a key entry point to the City of London. The other three stations on the branch (Old Street, Essex Road and Drayton Park) all have two through platforms each, all of which serve only the Moorgate Branch.

The platforms at Moorgate, Old Street, Essex Road and Highbury & Islington are all of sub-surface ‘tube’ type, although the line is of larger loading gauge than LUL ‘tube’ lines allowing operation by Class 313 EMUs which are the only rolling stock type used on the line. Due to the single line tunnel configuration of the line and its frequent service, the signalling incorporates a train stop system as traditionally used by LUL, but rarely found on Network Rail routes.

11 Following the introduction of ERTMS in 2019, the requirements for future growth and the ability of ERTMS to meet them will be reviewed.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN105: Moorgate to Finsbury Park Junction description

Section start Moorgate Station

Section end Finsbury Park Junction

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals Track Circuit Block European Rail Traffic ERTMS ERTMS is due to be (TCB) Management System installed on this branch in (ERTMS) 2019.

Speed Predominantly 30mph Predominantly 30mph Predominantly 30mph

Electrification DC 3rd rail from DC 3rd rail from DC 3rd rail from Moorgate to Drayton Moorgate to Drayton Moorgate to Drayton Park; AC OHL from Park; AC OHL from Park; AC OHL from Drayton Park to Drayton Park to Drayton Park to Finsbury Park Junction Finsbury Park Junction Finsbury Park Junction

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey and Moorgate to Finsbury Park Moorgate to Finsbury Park Moorgate to Finsbury Park typical (11½ minutes Down; 13 (11½ minutes Down; 13 (11½ minutes Down; 13 journey time minutes Up) minutes Up) minutes Up)

Number of Monday to Friday Monday to Friday Monday to Friday trains per 3 tph (4 peak) Moorgate to 2 tph Moorgate to Welwyn 2 tph Moorgate to Welwyn hour Welwyn Garden City Garden City Garden City 2 tph (7 peak) Moorgate to 4 tph (8 peak) Moorgate to 4 tph (8 peak) Moorgate to Hertford North line Hertford North line Hertford North line 1 tph (2 peak) Moorgate to 2 tph Moorgate to 2 tph) Moorgate to Stevenage/Letchworth Stevenage/Letchworth via Stevenage/Letchworth via Hertford North Hertford North

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 0 As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in Approximately 5 trains per trains per Strategic Freight the Strategic annum use the section day* Network plan Freight Network between Drayton Park and plan Finsbury Park

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years number Notes of level crossings level crossings of level crossings crossing type

As determined by Level As determined by There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy Level Crossing crossings on this SRS policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Northern Renewal of fire MEB1 2012 Renewal of fire alarm In development City Line alarm system system Fire Alarm Renewal

13 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation date

ECML Reinstatement of MEB1, CP5 Provision of extra Additional In development Inner Moorgate Branch ECM1, peak signalling will only Suburban signals, upgrading HDB capacity/improved be re-instated on Capacity DC traction power performance on the the branch if this is supply, some Welwyn Garden City a cost-effective resignalling of the and Hertford North to measure for the Hertford Loop, & Moorgate services interim period until improved turnback the installation of facilities and ERTMS. crossovers at Gordon Hill and Stevenage

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

14 SRS G.03 - Hertford Loop

Route specification description

The Hertford Loop extends for 23.1 miles from Wood Green North Junction to Langley Junctions (near Stevenage), thereby forming a loop off the southern section of the East Coast Main Line (SRS G.01), to which it is joined at both ends. It is double track and electrified (with 25kV OHL) along its whole length, and serves 11 stations, of which the most significant (in terms of passenger numbers) are Palmers Green, Winchmore Hill, Hertford North, Enfield Chase and Gordon Hill. It is served by frequent inner suburban services, which run to King’s Cross in the early morning, late evening, and at weekends, and to Moorgate for most of the day Monday to Friday. The northerly limits of Hertford loop services are generally Gordon Hill, Hertford North or Letchworth at which suitable turnback facilities exist. Gordon Hill and Hertford North stations each have three platforms, both being equipped with a south-facing turnback platform in addition to the up and down through platforms. The other nine stations (Bowes Park, Palmers Green, Winchmore Hill, Grange Park, Enfield Chase, Crews Hill, Cuffley, Bayford and Watton-at-Stone) are all served by two through platforms. There are electrified carriage sidings at Hertford North.

The line operates through a largely built up area as far as Gordon Hill with a more rural environment further north in which the largest community is at Hertford. It passes for some distance through a Conservation area immediately north of Hertford North station.

In addition to providing a key suburban link for parts of north London and Hertfordshire, the Hertford loop also has an important role as a diversionary route for services normally routed via Welwyn Garden City at times when the ECML is unavailable due to planned maintenance work or incident. It is also the main route

15 for through freight trains between Wood Green and Langley Junction. As such, it forms a critical element of the total rail operation in the London – Stevenage corridor.

Following the introduction of ERTMS in 2019, the requirements for future growth and the ability of ERTMS to meet them will be reviewed.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN120: Wood Green Junction to Langley Junction description

Section start Wood Green Junction

Section end Langley Junction

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W9 W9/W10 W9/W10

Signals Track Circuit Block European Rail Traffic ERTMS ERTMS is due to be (TCB) Management System installed on this line in 2019. (ERTMS)

Speed Predominantly 75 mph Predominantly 75 mph Raise linespeed to highest possible in line with infrastructure characteristics and capability of rolling stock

Electrification 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey and Bowes Park to Stevenage Bowes Park to Stevenage Bowes Park to Stevenage typical journey time 39 minutes 39 minutes 39 minutes

Number of Monday to Friday Monday to Friday Monday to Friday trains per 2 tph (7 peak) Moorgate to 4 tph (8 peak) Moorgate to 4 tph (8 peak) Moorgate to hour Hertford North Gordon Hill/Hertford North Gordon Hill/Hertford North 1 tph (2 peak) Moorgate to 2 tph Moorgate to 2 tph Moorgate to Stevenage/Letchworth Stevenage/Letchworth Stevenage/Letchworth

Weekends Weekends Weekends 1 tph King’s Cross to 1 tph King’s Cross to Hertford 1 tph King’s Cross to Hertford North North Hertford North 1 tph King’s Cross to 1 tph King’s Cross to 1 tph King’s Cross to Stevenage Stevenage Stevenage

16 Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 3 As per forecasts in the As per Busiest section is between trains per Strategic Freight Network forecasts in Hertford North and day* plan the Strategic Stevenage Freight Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years number of Notes of level crossings level crossings level crossings crossing type

As determined by Level As determined by Level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 1

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Hertford North ATO Facility to test HDB 2012 Ability to provide safe In development Test Facility automatic train automatic train operation for operation for major Thameslink enhancement and Crossrail programmes programmes

17 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

ECML Inner Upgrading AC HDB, 2019 Provision of extra In development Suburban traction power ECM1 diversionary and Capacity supply, some turnback peak (Stevenage & resignalling of the capability on the Gordon Hill) Hertford Loop, & Hertford North to improved turnback Moorgate services facilities at Stevenage & Gordon Hill

IEP Infrastructure works HDB 2019 Ability to In development development/ to accommodate accommodate IEP enabling works operation of IEP services rolling stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

18 SRS G.04 - Hitchin - Cambridge

Route specification description

The Hitchin to Cambridge Line extends for 23¼ miles from Hitchin Cambridge Junction (where it links to the East Coast Main Line north of Hitchin) to Shepreth Branch Junction (where it meets the West Anglia Main Line south of Cambridge). It is double track and electrified (with 25kV OHL) along its whole length. It provides a valuable link between Cambridge and London, accommodating as it does the generally half- hourly Cambridge – London fast service, one of which each hour starts from King’s Lynn.

There are seven stations, namely (in descending order of passenger numbers) Letchworth Garden City, Royston, Baldock, Meldreth, Ashwell & Morden, Shepreth and Foxton. All have stations have two through platforms, and are served by First Capital Connect (FCC) outer suburban services running between King’s Cross and Cambridge. The platforms at Royston have recently been extended to 12-car length to accommodate the longer trains necessitated by growing demand; both tracks through the platforms at Royston are signalled for reversible working, giving additional flexibility. In the early mornings and evenings, Letchworth and Royston are often served by FCC’s longer-distance outer suburban services between King’s Cross and King’s Lynn. Letchworth is also served by FCC inner suburban services to London via Hertford North, which terminate at King’s Cross in the early mornings, late evenings, and at weekends, and at Moorgate for most of the day Monday to Friday. The main station building at Letchworth is listed and is situated within a Conservation Area.

There is a light maintenance depot for EMU stock east of Letchworth station, and aggregates facility near Foxton reached via the Barrington Light Railway which has a connection facing towards Cambridge.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN125: Hitchin Cambridge Junction to Shepreth Branch Junction description

Section start Hitchin Cambridge Junction

Section end Shepreth Branch Junction

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block (TCB) (TCB) (TCB)

Speed Predominantly 90 mph Predominantly 90 mph Raise linespeed to highest possible in line with infrastructure characteristics and capability of rolling stock

Electrification 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Hitchin to Cambridge Hitchin to Cambridge Introduction of IEP coupled and with implementation of typical 40 minutes 40 minutes infrastructure interventions can journey be expected to provide some time improvement

Number 4 tph (7 peak) King’s Cross to 4 tph King’s Cross to 4 tph King’s Cross to of trains Royston/Cambridge/King’s Royston/Cambridge/King’s Royston/Cambridge/King’s per hour Lynn Lynn Lynn

1 tph (2 peak) Moorgate to 2 tph Thameslink Core to 2 tph Thameslink Core to Letchworth (weekdays) Cambridge Cambridge

2 tph Moorgate to Letchworth 2 tph Moorgate to Letchworth (weekdays) (weekdays)

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 3 As per forecasts in the As per Busiest section is Hitchin to trains per Strategic Freight Network forecasts in Letchworth day* plan the Strategic Freight Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years number Notes of level crossings level crossings of level crossings crossing type

As determined by Level As determined by Supervised: 0 Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic: 1

User: 7

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

FCC platform Platform SBR 2012 Increased capacity Under lengthening lengthening at through train construction Letchworth lengthening to 12-car

Hitchin Interlocking Renewal of ECM1, 2012 Maintain capability Under renewal/resignalling interlocking SBR construction

Hitchin grade Revised layout ECM1, 2013 Increased capacity In development separation at Hitchin SBR and improved journey Cambridge times, safety and Junction taking performance the Down Cambridge line trains over the ECML

21 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Foxton Signalling SBR 2016 Signalling interlocking In development Resignalling interlocking renewal renewal

Harston AHBC Renewal of AHB SBR 2018 Renewal of AHB level In development Renewal level crossing crossing

Hauxton AHBC Renewal of AHB SBR 2018 Renewal of AHB level In development Renewal level crossing crossing

Shepreth AHBC Renewal of AHB SBR 2018 Renewal of AHB level In development Renewal level crossing crossing

Litlington AHBC Renewal of AHB SBR 2019 Renewal of AHB level In development Renewal level crossing crossing

IEP development/ Infrastructure SBR 2019 Ability to In development enabling works works to accommodate IEP accommodate services operation of IEP rolling stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

22 SRS G.05 - Peterborough - Doncaster

Route specification description

This SRS forms one of the central sections of the East Coast Main Line, and runs for 79½ miles from Peterborough to Doncaster. It comprises five tracks from Peterborough to Helpston Junction, four tracks from Helpston Junction to Stoke Tunnel, and predominantly two tracks from Grantham to the southern approaches to Doncaster. It is electrified (with 25kV OHL) along its whole length. It intersects with the GN/GE Joint Line (from Peterborough to Doncaster via Lincoln) at Werrington Junction, the Peterborough to Leicester line at Helpston Junction, the Nottingham to Skegness line at Grantham, the Nottingham to Lincoln line at Newark, the Sheffield to Lincoln line at Retford, and numerous freight and passenger lines near Doncaster. The only passenger services which use the route along its entire length are long distance high speed (LDHS) trains from London King’s Cross to Yorkshire, the North East, and Scotland, operated by East Coast, Hull Trains and Grand Central. However, CrossCountry’s Birmingham to Cambridge/Stansted services use the route between Peterborough and Helpston Junction, East Midlands Trains’ Liverpool to Norwich service runs between Peterborough and Grantham, and East Midlands Trains’ local services (from Peterborough to Spalding/Lincoln) use the route as far as Werrington Junction.

There are five stations on this section, namely (in descending order of passenger numbers) Peterborough, Doncaster, Grantham, Newark North Gate and Retford. Peterborough currently has five platforms, but work is being undertaken to increase this to seven. As well as marking the northernmost limit of First Capital Connect’s outer suburban services, and providing a stop for many of East Coast’s LDHS trains, Peterborough also accommodates two regular east-west services (namely CrossCountry’s Birmingham to Cambridge/Stansted services, and East Midlands Trains’ Liverpool to Norwich service) and less frequent local trains to Lincolnshire via Spalding and to Ipswich via Bury St Edmunds.

23 Doncaster has four through platforms, two north-facing bay platforms on the down side and two south-facing bay platforms, one each on the up and down sides. As well as the LDHS services operated by East Coast, Grand Central and Hull Trains, it accommodates First TransPennine Express services between Manchester Airport and Cleethorpes, and numerous local services run by Northern Rail.

Grantham has three through platforms and one north-facing bay platform. It accommodates LDHS services operated by East Coast and Hull Trains, plus East Midlands Trains’ Liverpool to Norwich and Nottingham to Skegness services.

Newark North Gate has three through platforms. It serves East Coast LDHS trains, plus East Midlands Trains’ Nottingham to Lincoln and Newark to Grimsby Town services.

Retford has two through platforms on the East Coast Main Line, and two through platforms on the Sheffield to Lincoln line. It is served by East Coast and Hull Trains LDHS services from King’s Cross, plus Northern Rail’s Sheffield to Lincoln local services. There are numerous operational, maintenance and freight facilities along the route, of which the most significant include five sets of sidings accessed from the north side of Peterborough station (Crescent, Crescent Wharf, Westwood, Spital and New England), Peterborough North Depot, Peterborough Electrification Depot, a concrete plant at Tallington, a small number of freight sidings at Grantham and Newark, and a large complex of freight facilities at Doncaster Railport (including Doncaster Royal Mail Terminal, several sets of sidings, and DB Schenker’s maintenance depot).

Following the introduction of ERTMS in 2019, the requirements for future growth and the ability of ERTMS to meet them will be reviewed.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN101: Peterborough to Doncaster description

Section start Peterborough Station

Section end Doncaster Station

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W9 W9/W10 W9/W10

Signals Track Circuit Block European Rail Traffic ERTMS ERTMS is due to be (TCB) Management System installed on this line by (ERTMS) 2019.

Speed Fast lines: Fast lines: Raise linespeed to Predominantly 125 Predominantly 125 highest possible in line mph mph with infrastructure characteristics and Slow lines (to Stoke Slow lines (to Stoke capability of rolling Tunnel): Tunnel): stock Predominantly 80 mph Predominantly 80 mph

Electrification 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL

24 Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Peterborough to Doncaster Peterborough to Doncaster Introduction of IEP coupled and with implementation of typical 53 minutes 53 minutes infrastructure interventions journey can be expected to provide time some improvement

Number LDHS LDHS LDHS of trains 2 tph (3 peak) King’s Cross 3 tph King’s Cross to 3 tph King’s Cross to per hour to Newcastle/Scotland Newcastle/Scotland Newcastle/Scotland 1 tph King’s Cross to 2 tph (3 peak) King’s Cross 3 tph King’s Cross to Leeds Newark/York to Leeds 1 tph King’s Cross to Hull or 2 tph (3 peak) King’s Cross 1 tph King’s Cross to Hull or Sunderland or Bradford to Leeds Sunderland or Bradford Interchange 1 tph King’s Cross to Hull or Interchange 2 tph King’s Cross to Sunderland or Bradford 2 tph King’s Cross to Yorkshire (exact destination Interchange Yorkshire (exact destination t.b.c.) t.b.c.) Other Other 1 tph Norwich to Liverpool Other 1 tph Norwich to Liverpool 1 tph Peterborough to 1 tph Norwich to Liverpool 1 tph Peterborough to Spalding/Lincoln 1 tph Peterborough to Spalding/Lincoln Spalding/Lincoln

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 21 As per forecasts in the As per Busiest section is trains per Strategic Freight Network forecasts in Peterborough to Werrington day* plan the Strategic Junction Freight Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years number Notes of level crossings level crossings of level crossings crossing type

As determined by Level As determined by Supervised: 26 Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic: 3

User: 20

25 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

ECML Overhead Line Various ECM1 2013 Better Under Performance improvements performance and construction Improvement to OHL along engineering line of route access

Capacity relief Enhancement WEB, 2014 Increased Impacts In development Peterborough to of the GN/GE SPD1/2/3/4, capacity and this SRS Doncaster Joint Line via ECM1 improved at Spalding and performance, Werrington Lincoln plus 7 Day Junction Railway opportunities

Peterborough station New platform ECM1 2013 Increased In development additional island on the capacity and platform western side improved of the station performance

Doncaster to Water Gauge ECM1 2014 To Under Orton (W10 Route clearance on accommodate construction Clearances) the ECML the carriage of and deep sea connecting container traffic routes on the ECML and connecting routes

ECML South (W10 Gauge ECM1 2014 To In development Route Clearances) clearance on accommodate the ECML the carriage of and deep sea connecting container traffic routes on the ECML and connecting routes

GN/GE (Pyewipe Increase BHP, 2014 Improved freight In development Junction to Doncaster) gauge at SPD3/4 capacity; new gauge clearance northern end diversionary of GN/GE line route to W10 (as per previous 3rd party project)

26 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Peterborough Platform Additional ECM1 2014 Reduction of the In development 3U platform on time penalty for a Up Fast line Peterborough (for LDHS stop in Up Fast services) services

Osterfen MCB(CCTV) Full renewal ECM1 2014 Full renewal of In development Renewal of MCB(CCTV) MCB(CCTV) level crossing level crossing

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project description ELR Imple- Output change Notes Status ment- ation date

Rossington Full renewal of ECM1 2015 Full renewal of In development MCB(CCTV) MCB(CCTV) level MCB(CCTV) level Renewal crossing crossing

GN/GE Alterations to ECM1, 2018 Increased capacity for In development Southern platform/junction WEB both passenger and Access layout and/or freight services through (Werrington possible construction Peterborough, and Junction) of avoiding line reduced journey times for passenger services stopping at Peterborough

Doncaster Collection of minor ECM1, 2018 Increased capacity for In development Capacity improvements to SPD4, services through Schemes infrastructure in the BKS, Doncaster Doncaster area PED5, DOL1, DOW

Peterborough Provision of EMP, 2018 Maximisation of capacity In development to GN/GE independent access ECM1, Southern to GN/GE Joint Line WEB Access for trains from Ely- March-Peterborough line

27 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project description ELR Imple- Output change Notes Status ment- ation date

Newark Flyover Replacement of ECM1, 2018 Improved performance, In development Newark Flat NOB1, reduced journey times Crossing with a NSE and reduced fuel bridge carrying the consumption on the Nottingham & ECML; improved Lincoln line over the performance and ECML increased capacity on the Nottingham & Lincoln line

Lolham Full renewal of ECM1 2019 Full renewal of In development MCB(CCTV) MCB(CCTV) level MCB(CCTV) level Renewal crossing crossing

Church Lane Full renewal of ECM1 2019 Full renewal of In development MCB(CCTV) MCB(CCTV) level MCB(CCTV) level Renewal crossing crossing

IEP Infrastructure works ECM1 2019 Ability to accommodate In development development/ to accommodate IEP services enabling works operation of IEP rolling stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

28 SRS G.06 - Doncaster - Holbeck West Junction

Route specification description

This section is effectively a branch of the East Coast Main Line, and runs for 29 miles from Doncaster to just west of Leeds. It is two track and electrified (with 25kV OHL) along its whole length, with the addition of loops at Hemsworth and through Wakefield Westgate station. It intersects with numerous passenger and freight routes at both the Doncaster and Leeds ends, with the Skellow freight line at Carcroft and Adwick Junctions, with the Swinton to Pontefract line at South Kirkby Junction, with Crofton freight branch at Hare Park Junction, and with the Wakefield Kirkgate to Mirfield line at Westgate South Junction. It is used by long distance high speed (LDHS) East Coast services from King’s Cross to Leeds, by CrossCountry’s Edinburgh to Plymouth services, and by Northern Rail local services connecting Sheffield, Doncaster and Leeds.

There are eight stations on the route, namely (in descending order of passenger numbers) Doncaster, Wakefield Westgate, South Elmsall, Outwood, Adwick, Fitzwilliam, Sandal & Agbrigg and Bentley. Doncaster has four through platforms, two north-facing bay platforms, and two south-facing bay platforms. As well as LDHS services operated by East Coast, Grand Central and Hull Trains, it accommodates TransPennine services between Manchester Airport and Cleethorpes, and numerous local services run by Northern Rail. All of the remaining stations have two through platforms, although those at Wakefield Westgate are long enough to accommodate East Coast and CrossCountry LDHS services – all of which stop there – whereas the other stations only serve Northern Rail local trains and are of appropriate length for such use. Sidings at Wakefield Westgate are available for passenger and freight purposes but see only occasional use and apart from the passenger stations and loops are the only notable facility along the route.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN836: Doncaster to Holbeck West Junction description

Section start Doncaster Station

Section end Holbeck West Junction

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W9 W9/W10 from W9/W10 from Doncaster to Hare Doncaster to Hare Park Park Junction, W9 Junction, W9 thereafter thereafter

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block European Rail Traffic (TCB) (TCB) Management System (ERTMS)

Speed Predominantly Predominantly Raise linespeed to 100mph south of 100mph south of highest possible in line Sandal & Agbrigg, Sandal & Agbrigg, with infrastructure 75mph thereafter 75mph thereafter characteristics and capability of rolling stock

Electrification 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey and Doncaster to Leeds Doncaster to Leeds Introduction of IEP coupled typical LDHS: 38 minutes LDHS: 38 minutes with implementation of journey time Local: 48 minutes Local: 48 minutes infrastructure interventions can be expected to provide some improvement

Number of LDHS LDHS LDHS trains per 2 tph (3 peak) King’s Cross 2 tph (3+ peak) King’s 2+ tph (3+ peak) King’s Cross hour to Leeds Cross to Leeds to Leeds 1tph Plymouth to 1tph Plymouth to 1tph Plymouth to Edinburgh Edinburgh Edinburgh Local Local Local 2 tph Doncaster to Leeds 1 tph (2 peak) Doncaster to 1 tph (2 peak) Doncaster to 1 tph Sheffield to Leeds Leeds Leeds 1 tph Sheffield to Adwick 1 tph Sheffield to Leeds 1 tph Sheffield to Leeds 1 tph Sheffield to Adwick 1 tph Sheffield to Adwick

30 Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 19 As per forecasts in the As per Busiest section is from South trains per Strategic Freight Network forecasts in Kirkby Junction to Hare Park day* plan the Strategic Junction Freight Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined by Supervised: 2 Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 5

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation date

Ardsley Feeder Installation of DOL2 2014 Additional traction In development Station additional traction power supply Reinforcement power supply transformer in vicinity of existing Ardsley feeder station with UTX and new equipment both north and south of line

31 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Doncaster to Platform extensions DOL1/2 2014-19 Increased capacity In development Leeds platform at South Elmsall, through train extensions Fitzwiliam, Sandal & lengthening Outwood

Bentley Full renewal of DOL1 2015 Full renewal of In development MCB(CCTV) MCB(CCTV) level MCB(CCTV) level Renewal crossing crossing

Wakefield Signalling recontrol DOL1/2 2016 Signalling recontrol In development Westgate Recontrol

Dock Hills Full renewal of DOL1 2016 Full renewal of In development MCB(CCTV) MCB(CCTV) level MCB(CCTV) level Renewal crossing crossing

Skellow Signalling DOL1 2017 Signalling In development Resignalling interlocking renewal interlocking renewal

South Kirkby - Improve capacity DOL1/2 2018 Improved capacity In development Wakefield and performance and performance Westgate between South enhancements Kirkby Junction and Hare Park Junction

Doncaster Collection of minor ECM1, 2018 Increased capacity In development Capacity improvements to SPD4, for services Schemes infrastructure in the BKS, through Doncaster Doncaster area PED5, DOL1, DOW

IEP Infrastructure works DOL1/2 2019 Ability to In development development/ to accommodate accommodate IEP enabling works operation of IEP services rolling stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

32 SRS G.07 - Doncaster - Colton Junction

Route specification description

This section comprises part of the East Coast Main Line, and runs for 27 miles from Doncaster to Colton Junction (which is 5½ miles south of York). It is two track and electrified (with 25kV OHL) along its whole length. It intersects with numerous passenger and freight lines at Doncaster, with the Askern Branch at Shaftholme Junction, with the Skellow freight line at Joan Croft Junction, with a branch to Selby at Templehirst Junction, with the Hull to Leeds line at Hambleton Junctions, and with the York to Leeds line at Colton Junction.

Passenger trains frequently using this route are CrossCountry’s Reading to Newcastle services, and trains from King’s Cross to Yorkshire, the North East, and Scotland, operated by East Coast, Grand Central and Hull Trains. (The Hull Trains services leave the route at Templehirst Junction en route to Selby and Hull.) A small number of Northern Rail services use parts of the route to travel from Selby to either Doncaster or York. Apart from Doncaster (which has four through platforms, two north-facing bay platforms, and two south-facing bay platforms) there are no stations on this section. There is a freight private siding at Heck which sees regular traffic. A down passenger loop is provided at Arksey, a short distance north of Doncaster.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN101: Doncaster to Shaftholme Junction description LN600: Shaftholme Junction to Colton Junction

Section start Doncaster Station

Section end Colton Junction

Route 9 (Doncaster to 9 (Doncaster to 9 (Doncaster to availability Templehirst Templehirst Templehirst Junction); (RA) Junction); 10 Junction); 10 10 (Templehirst (Templehirst Junction (Templehirst Junction Junction to Colton to Colton Junction) to Colton Junction) Junction)

Gauge W9 W9/W10 W9/W10

Signals Track Circuit Block TCB European Rail Traffic (TCB) Management System (ERTMS)

Speed Predominantly 125 Predominantly 125 Raise linespeed to mph mph highest possible in line with infrastructure characteristics and capability of rolling stock

Electrification 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Doncaster to York Doncaster to York Introduction of IEP coupled and with implementation of typical 24 minutes 24 minutes infrastructure interventions can journey be expected to provide some time improvement

Number LDHS LDHS LDHS of trains 2 tph (3 peak) King’s Cross to 3 tph King’s Cross to 3 tph King’s Cross to per Newcastle/Scotland Newcastle/Scotland Newcastle/Scotland hour 1 tph King’s Cross to 1+ tph King’s Cross to 1+ tph King’s Cross to York/Sunderland York/Sunderland York/Sunderland 1 tph Reading to Newcastle 1 tph King’s Cross to 1 or 2 tph King’s Cross to new 8 tpd King’s Cross to Hull Yorkshire (details tbc) destinations (details tbc) 1 tph Reading to Newcastle 1tph Reading to Newcastle 8+ tpd King’s Cross to Hull 8+ tpd King’s Cross to Hull

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 28 As per forecasts in the As per Busiest section is Doncaster trains per Strategic Freight Network forecasts in to Shaftholme Junction day* plan the Strategic Freight Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years number of Notes of level crossings level crossings level crossings crossing type

As determined by Level As determined by Supervised: 11 Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 13

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Daw Lane MCB(CCTV) Full renewal of ECM1 2012 Full renewal of In development Renewal MCB(CCTV) MCB(CCTV) level level crossing crossing

North Doncaster Chord Provision of ECM1/2, 2014 Increased capacity, In development (Shaftholme Junction & flyover KWS, improved Joan Croft Junction re- connecting CJS performance, and modelling) Askern and reduced coal train Applehurst journey time Junction lines

Templehirst Junction S&C renewal ECM2/3, 2014 S&C renewal In development S&C Renewal TCW1

35 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Moat Hills Full renewal of ECM1 2016 Full renewal of In development MCB(CCTV) MCB(CCTV) level MCB(CCTV) level Renewal crossing crossing

Arksey Full renewal of ECM1 2016 Full renewal of In development MCB(CCTV) MCB(CCTV) level MCB(CCTV) level Renewal crossing crossing

IEP Infrastructure ECM1/2/3 2019 Ability to In development development/ works to accommodate IEP enabling works accommodate services operation of IEP rolling stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

36 SRS G.08 - Colton Junction - Northallerton

Route specification description

This section comprises part of the East Coast Main Line, and runs for 35½ miles from Colton Junction (which is 5½ miles south of York) to Northallerton. It is four track along almost its whole length, and is electrified with 25kV OHL. It intersects with the Harrogate to York and York to Scarborough lines near York, and the Northallerton to Eaglescliffe line at Northallerton. The portion between Colton Junction and York is used by numerous CrossCountry, East Coast, First TransPennine Express, Grand Central and Northern Rail services. Meanwhile, the section north of York is used by East Coast services from King’s Cross to Newcastle and Scotland, Grand Central trains from King’s Cross to Hartlepool and Sunderland, CrossCountry services from Reading to Newcastle and Plymouth to Edinburgh, and First TransPennine Express services from Manchester Airport to Middlesbrough or Newcastle.

There are three stations on the route, namely (in descending order of passenger numbers) York, Northallerton and Thirsk. York has 11 platforms in total, comprising six through platforms, three south-facing bay platforms, and two north-facing bay platforms. All services using this SRS stop at York (except East Coast’s one ‘Flying Scotsman’ service on weekday mornings). The main station buildings at York are listed and much of the station is within a Conservation Area.

Northallerton and Thirsk each have two through platforms. Both stations are served by Grand Central and First TransPennine services, whilst Northallerton is also served by East Coast trains.

There are several operational, engineering and freight facilities on this SRS. Holgate Reception Sidings are located ½ mile south of York station, whilst the York Teardrop site (between the ECML and the York Main Goods Lines) accommodates a DB Schenker depot, Leeman Road Engineers’ Yard, York South Sidings,

37 and facilities belonging to the National Railway Museum. There is also a light maintenance depot north of York station servicing First TransPennine Express Class 185 units.

Klondyke Yard and York North Sidings are located to the west of the Teardrop and there are also small sidings at Tollerton and Thirsk, all of which see only limited use.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN600: Colton Junction to Northallerton description LN724: Holgate Junction to Skelton Junction (Goods Avoiding Line)

Section start Colton Junction

Section end Northallerton Station

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W9 W9/W10 W9/W10

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block European Rail Traffic (TCB) (TCB) Management System (ERTMS)

Speed Fast lines: 125 mph Fast lines: 125 mph Raise linespeed to highest possible in line Slow lines: Slow lines: with infrastructure Predominantly 70 mph Predominantly 70 mph characteristics and south of Thirsk, 90 south of Thirsk, 90 capability of rolling mph thereafter mph thereafter stock

Electrification 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey York to Northallerton York to Northallerton Introduction of IEP coupled and with implementation of typical 24 minutes 24 minutes infrastructure interventions journey can be expected to provide time some improvement

38 Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number LDHS LDHS LDHS of trains 2 tph (3 peak) King’s Cross to 3 tph King’s Cross to 3 tph King’s Cross to per hour Newcastle/Scotland Newcastle/Scotland Newcastle/Scotland 1 tph King’s Cross to 4 tpd King’s Cross to 4 tpd King’s Cross to York/Sunderland Sunderland Sunderland 1 tph Plymouth to Edinburgh 1 tph Plymouth to Edinburgh 1 tph Plymouth to 1 tph Reading to Newcastle 1 tph Reading to Newcastle Edinburgh 1 tph Reading to Newcastle Other Other 1 tph Liverpool to Scarborough 1 tph Liverpool to Other 1 tph Blackpool to York Scarborough 1 tph Liverpool to 1 tph Hull/Selby to York 1 tph Blackpool to York Scarborough 1 tph (2 peak) York to 1 tph Hull/Selby to York 1 tph Blackpool to York Harrogate/Leeds 1 tph (2 peak) York to 1 tph Hull/Selby to York 1 tph Manchester Airport to Harrogate/Leeds 1 tph (2 peak) York to Newcastle 1 tph Manchester Airport to Harrogate/Leeds 1 tph Manchester Airport to Newcastle 1 tph Manchester Airport to Middlesbrough 1 tph Manchester Airport to Newcastle Middlesbrough 1 tph Manchester Airport to Middlesbrough

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 31 As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the Busiest section is York to trains per Strategic Freight Strategic Freight Northallerton day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years number Notes of level crossings level crossings of level crossings crossing type

As determined by Level As determined by Supervised: 0 Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic: 1

User: 13

39 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

York Holgate Junction New line from ECM4 2011 Increased capacity Under 4th line Holgate and improved construction Junction to performance, plus 7 Platforms 1-11 Day Railway at York station, opportunities and improvement of restrictive signalling arrangements

Colton North Junction S&C renewal ECM4 2013 S&C renewal In development S&C Renewal

ECML level crossing Closure of ECM5 2014 Increased capacity Under closure programme level crossings and improved safety construction that would and performance become high risk with an increase in train movements

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

IEP development/ Infrastructure ECM4/5 2019 Ability to In development enabling works works to accommodate IEP accommodate services operation of IEP rolling stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

40 SRS G.09 - Northallerton - Newcastle

Route specification description

This section comprises part of the East Coast Main Line, and runs for 50¼ miles from Northallerton to Newcastle. It is generally two track, but widens to four tracks across the King Edward Bridge into Newcastle. It is electrified with 25kV OHL along its whole length. It intersects with the Northallerton to Eaglescliffe line at Northallerton, with the Darlington to Eaglescliffe and Darlington to Bishop Auckland lines at Darlington, with the Stillington Branch and Leamside line at Ferryhill, and with the Newcastle to Carlisle line at Newcastle King Edward Bridge South Junction).

It carries East Coast services from King’s Cross to Newcastle and Scotland, CrossCountry’s Reading to Newcastle and Plymouth to Edinburgh trains, TransPennine’s Manchester Airport to Newcastle services, and some Northern Rail trains running from Middlesbrough to Newcastle in the early morning. There are five stations on the route, namely (in descending order of passenger numbers) Newcastle, Darlington, Durham, Northallerton, and Chester-le-Street. Newcastle has twelve platforms in total, comprising seven through platforms, four south-facing bay platforms, and one north-facing bay platform. As well as the long-distance high-speed (LDHS) and TransPennine services running along this SRS, Newcastle accommodates Northern Rail local services running on the Newcastle to Carlisle line, the Middlesbrough to Newcastle via the Durham Coast line, and on the ECML to Morpeth and Chathill. It is a key city centre station and apart from interchange between heavy rail services also provides an important passenger interface with Tyne & Wear Metro and local bus services. The station buildings at Newcastle and Durham are listed and situated within a Conservation Area. Darlington currently has four platforms, comprising two through platforms and two south-facing bay platforms; this station also includes listed buildings. As well as LDHS and TransPennine services, Darlington accommodates Northern Rail local trains to Bishop Auckland and

41 Saltburn via Middlesbrough. The station at Darlington is effectively sited on a series of loop lines; up and down main lines which pass outside the station area are available for non-stopping trains.

Durham, Northallerton and Chester-le-Street each have two through platforms. There are several operational, engineering and freight facilities on this SRS. There are some engineering sidings north of Darlington, sidings operated by DB Schenker and Lafarge Aggregates between Ferryhill South Junction and Tursdale Junction, and six sets of sidings (one of which is electrified) between Birtley Junction and Low Fell Junction. At Newcastle, a connection from Forth Banks engineers’ siding runs to the south-facing bay platforms and one of the through lines.

There are a number of loops available on this section in the form of a down passenger and up goods loop at Darlington, an up goods loop and down and up slow lines at Ferryhill, a down slow line and up loop line at Durham, and up and down slow line at Tyne Yard. The facility exists to enter Newcastle station from the south either via the normal route over the King Edward Bridge or alternatively over the High Level Bridge, and apart from providing a diversionary route when required this provides a useful opportunity to turn a train round, including electric stock, with minimum of disruption.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN600: Northallerton to Newcastle description

Section start Northallerton Station

Section end Newcastle Central Station

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W9 W9/W10 W9/W10

Signals Track Circuit Block TCB European Rail Traffic (TCB) Management System (ERTMS)

Speed Predominantly Predominantly Raise linespeed to 125mph south of 125mph south of highest possible in line Tursdale Junction; Tursdale Junction; with infrastructure varies from 75mph to varies from 75mph to characteristics and 115mph thereafter 115mph thereafter capability of rolling stock

Electrification 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL

42 Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Northallerton to Newcastle Northallerton to Newcastle Introduction of IEP coupled and 49 minutes 49 minutes with implementation of typical infrastructure interventions journey can be expected to provide time some improvement

Number LDHS LDHS LDHS of trains 2 tph (3 peak) King’s Cross to 3 tph King’s Cross to 3 tph King’s Cross to per hour Newcastle/Scotland Newcastle/Scotland Newcastle/Scotland 1 tph Plymouth to Edinburgh 1 tph Plymouth to Edinburgh 1 tph Plymouth to Edinburgh 1 tph Reading to Newcastle 1 tph Reading to Newcastle 1 tph Reading to Newcastle

Other Other Other 1 tph Manchester Airport to 1 tph Manchester Airport to 1 tph Manchester Airport to Newcastle Newcastle Newcastle 3 tpd Saltburn/Middlesbrough 3 tpd Saltburn/Middlesbrough 3 tpd Saltburn/Middlesbrough to Newcastle via Durham to Newcastle via Durham to Newcastle via Durham (northbound only) (northbound only) (northbound only)

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 12 As per forecasts in the As per Ferryhill South Junction to Low trains per Strategic Freight forecasts in Fell Junction is busiest day* Network plan the Strategic section; the Leamside line Freight may be reopened to Network accommodate this traffic in the plan long term

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years number Notes of level crossings level crossings of level crossings crossing type

As determined by Level As determined by Supervised: 1 Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 5

43 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Thompson Street Mitigation of ECM5 2013 Maintenance of In development East (Darlington) weak public safety standards Bridge road Reconstruction overbridge

Chowdene Mitigation of ECM5 2014 Maintenance of In development (Gateshead) Bridge weak public safety standards Reconstruction road overbridge

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Darlington Fast Construction of new ECM5 2018 Increased capacity In development Line Platforms platforms on the and reduced ECML fast lines at journey times for Darlington passenger services through Darlington

Ferryhill – Reinstatement of FEP, 2018 Provision of an In development Newcastle the route from ECM5, alternative freight capacity Ferryhill Junction to LEN3 route between (possible Pelaw Junction Ferryhill and Leamside Line Newcastle, with the Reinstatement) possibility of future passenger services

IEP Infrastructure works ECM5/6 2019 Ability to In development development/ to accommodate accommodate IEP enabling operation of IEP services works rolling stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

44 SRS G.10 - Newcastle - Border

Route specification description

This section of the East Coast Main Line (ECML) extends for just under 70 miles from Newcastle to the Scottish Border, three miles north of Berwick-upon-Tweed station. It is a predominantly two track section electrified throughout on the 25kV OHL system. There are up and down loops at Chevington, Alnmouth, Belford and Berwick-upon-Tweed and at Morpeth there is an up loop and a down slow line.

The line intersects at Bedlington North Junction with the Blyth & Tyne freight network to Bedlington and again with the Blyth & Tyne at Morpeth Junction and Morpeth North Junction. There are freight connections to coal disposal points at Butterwell and at Widdrington, whilst at Alnmouth, Tweedmouth and Berwick-upon- Tweed there are non-passenger sidings used mainly for engineers’ on-track machines and National Distribution Service traffic.

Train services are predominantly CrossCountry and East Coast long distance high speed services and freight trains. There is also a broadly hourly Northern Rail local service between Newcastle and Morpeth and a very limited peak hour Northern Rail service between Newcastle and Chathill.

There are stations at Manors, Cramlington, Morpeth, Pegswood, Widdrington, Acklington, Alnmouth, Chathill and Berwick-upon-Tweed. Only Morpeth, Alnmouth and Berwick are of sufficient length to accommodate LDHS trains, the remainder being served only by the local stopping service. Most of the stations have two platforms for up and down direction, except for Manors and Berwick-upon-Tweed which are island platforms with two faces. The station building at Berwick-upon-Tweed is listed and situated within a Conservation Area.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN600: Newcastle to Border description

Section start Newcastle Central Station

Section end Anglo-Scottish Border (ECM7, 69m 67ch)

Route 8 south of Heaton 8 south of Heaton 8 south of Heaton availability South Junction, 9 South Junction, 9 South Junction, 9 (RA) thereafter thereafter thereafter

Gauge W9 W9/W10 W9/W10

Signals Track Circuit Block TCB European Rail Traffic (TCB) Management System (ERTMS)

Speed Varies from 110mph to Varies from 110mph to Raise linespeed to 125mph 125mph highest possible in line with infrastructure characteristics and capability of rolling stock

Electrification 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey and Newcastle to Berwick- Newcastle to Berwick-upon- Introduction of IEP coupled typical upon-Tweed Tweed with implementation of journey time infrastructure interventions 45 minutes 45 minutes can be expected to provide some improvement

Number of 1-2 tph King’s Cross to 2 tph King’s Cross to 2 tph King’s Cross to Scotland trains per Scotland Scotland 1 tph Plymouth to Edinburgh hour 1 tph Plymouth to 1 tph Plymouth to Edinburgh 1 tph (2 peak) Newcastle to Edinburgh 1 tph (2 peak) Newcastle to Morpeth/Chathill 1 tph (2 peak) Newcastle to Morpeth/Chathill Morpeth/Chathill

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 7 As per forecasts in the As per Busiest section is Newcastle trains per Strategic Freight forecasts in East Junction to Heaton day* Network plan the Strategic South Junction Freight Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 28 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 2

User: 22

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation date

Newcastle Renewal of fire ECM6/7 2012 Maintenance of safety In development Station Fire alarm system standards Alarm Renewal

Ouseburn Strengthening of ECM7 2012/13 Maintenance of safety In development Viaduct main span standards Strengthening

Heaton Light Relocation of the ECM7 2012-14 Refurbished depot In development Maintenance carriage washing Depot machine, refurbishment of crane, renewal of heating system and boilers, asbestos removal, renewal of depot protection system

47 Widdrington Full renewal of ECM7 2013 Full renewal of In development MCB(CCTV) MCB(CCTV) level MCB(CCTV) level Renewal crossing crossing

ECML Overhead Various ECM7 2013 Better performance Under Line improvements to and engineering construction Performance OHL along line of access Improvement route

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation date

IEP Infrastructure works to ECM7 2019 Ability to accommodate In development development/ accommodate IEP services enabling operation of IEP rolling works stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

48 SRS G.13 - Newcastle – Carlisle

Route specification description

This 58-mile non-electrified line consists throughout its length of double track and apart from crossovers at broadly 10 mile intervals has quite a simple track layout. Other than the connections to the East Coast Main Line (ECML) at Newcastle (King Edward Bridge South Junction) and the Settle & Carlisle line and West Coast Main Line (WCML) at Carlisle (Petteril Bridge Junction and Carlisle South Junction), the only interface is with the Low Fell single line which gives access to the Tyneside Royal Mail terminal and in a south-facing direction to the ECML.

The line is typically used by two Northern Rail trains each hour between Newcastle and Hexham, one of which is a local stopping service terminating at Hexham and the other of which is semi-fast and runs through to Carlisle. Additionally, a local service operates at the Newcastle end as far as the Metrocentre at broadly half-hourly intervals geared mainly towards demand by shoppers. There is regular freight operation, typically linking the west of Scotland with east and north east England. The route also forms an important diversionary facility for Anglo-Scottish long distance high speed and freight trains when either the ECML or the WCML is unavailable north of Newcastle or Carlisle due to incident or planned engineering work.

There are 14 stations on the route, all of which consist of two platforms, with the exception of Dunston which is a single island platform with two faces. Demand is heaviest at the Metrocentre and Hexham, both of which have regular terminating trains.

There are few sidings – up and down recessing sidings, currently out of use, at Prudhoe, some lightly-used freight sidings at Hexham, a down side loop at Melkridge (originally serving a coal disposal point and at

49 present out of use), a down recessing siding, currently out of use, at Haydon Bridge and two up sidings at Haltwhistle. There are no rolling stock depots or active private sidings anywhere on the route.

Several listed buildings or structures are to be found in the station areas at Hexham, Haltwhistle and Wetheral, which are also situated within Conservation Areas. There are listed structures at Wylam, Prudhoe and Riding Mill stations whilst Haydon Bridge station is within a Conservation Area.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN682: Newcastle to Carlisle description

Section start King Edward Bridge South Junction

Section end Carlisle South Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W7 W7 W7

Signals Mainly Absolute Block Mainly TCB with some TCB (AB) with some Track AB Circuit Block (TCB)

Speed Predominantly 60mph Predominantly 60mph There is some potential for linespeed or 65mph or 65mph improvements on this route

Electrification None None None

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey and Newcastle to Carlisle Newcastle to Carlisle There is some potential for typical linespeed improvements on journey time 1 hour 32 minutes 1 hour 32 minutes this route

Number of 2 tph Newcastle to 2 tph Newcastle to 2 tph Newcastle to trains per MetroCentre MetroCentre MetroCentre hour 1 tph Newcastle to 1 tph Newcastle to Hexham 1 tph Newcastle to Hexham Hexham 1 tph Newcastle to 1 tph Newcastle to 1 tph Newcastle to Carlisle/Glasgow Central Carlisle/Glasgow Central Carlisle/Glasgow Central

50 Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 7 As per forecasts in the As per Norwood Junction to trains per Strategic Freight forecasts in MetroCentre is busiest day* Network plan the Strategic section Freight Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 10 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 10

User: 61

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Brampton Fell Full renewal of NEC2 2013 Full renewal of MGB In development MGB Renewal MGB level level crossing crossing

Wylam Signal Box Signal box NEC2 2014 Signal box In development Refurbishment refurbishment refurbishment

51 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation date

Corby Gates Installation of modular NEC2 2016 Upgraded In development Modular signalling signalling Signalling

Hexham Modular Installation of modular NEC2 2018 Upgraded In development Signalling signalling signalling

Haydon Bridge Installation of modular NEC2 2018 Upgraded In development Modular signalling signalling Signalling

Brampton Fell Installation of modular NEC2 2018 Upgraded In development Modular signalling signalling Signalling

Corby Gates Full renewal of MCB NEC2 2018 Full renewal of In development MCB Renewal level crossing MCB level crossing

Lane Head Installation of modular NEC2 2019 Upgraded In development Modular signalling signalling Signalling

IEP Infrastructure works to NEC1/2 2019 Ability to IEP In development development/ accommodate accommodate diversionary enabling operation of IEP IEP services route works rolling stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

52 SRS G.14 - Darlington - Bishop Auckland

Route specification description

This 11-mile non-electrified branch line leaves the East Coast Main Line at Darlington North Junction and is a mixture of double and single track, the double track being between Heighington and Shildon. There is an up and down goods loop at North Road, a connection to the National Railway Museum (NRM)’s ‘Locomotion’ base at Shildon and a connection with the heritage Weardale Railway at Bishop Auckland.

Stations are at North Road, Heighington, Newton Aycliffe, Shildon and Bishop Auckland. North Road and Bishop Auckland consist of a single platform whilst the others have two platforms. Weardale Railway has its own separate station at Bishop Auckland.

The train service is provided by Northern Rail and operates at broadly hourly or two-hourly intervals according to time of day. Freight traffic has recently resumed after some years absence in the form of coal trains originating from Wolsingham on the Weardale Railway. There are also occasional movements in connection with the NRM’s facility at Shildon.

There is a large listed building at North Road which forms the Darlington Railway Museum and spans the running line, although it does not form part of the present passenger station. The signal box at Shildon is listed, whilst there are Conservation Areas adjoining the stations at both Shildon and Bishop Auckland.

In January this year the line was designated a Community Rail service, under the aegis of the Bishop Line Community Rail Partnership. It has a strong historic aspect giving rise to it also being sometimes known as ‘The Heritage Line’. Both the NRM and the Weardale Railway have only emerged as generators of both passenger and non-passenger traffic in relatively recent years and further development based around them

53 can be expected in the years ahead. There are aspirations for an improved passenger service on the line so as to provide a regular hourly interval frequency throughout the day, which would be constrained more by platform and pathing considerations at Darlington station than by the characteristics of the line itself.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN678: Darlington to Bishop Auckland description

Section start Darlington North Junction

Section end Bishop Auckland Station

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block (TCB), except (TCB), except (TCB), except Absolute Block (AB) between Absolute Block (AB) Absolute Block (AB) Heighington and Shildon between Heighington between Heighington and Shildon and Shildon

Speed Predominantly 45mph Predominantly 45mph Raise linespeed to highest possible in line with infrastructure characteristics and capability of rolling stock

Electrification None None None

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey and Darlington to Bishop Darlington to Bishop Darlington to Bishop typical Auckland Auckland Auckland journey time 26 minutes 26 minutes 26 minutes

Number of 10 tpd Bishop Auckland to 1 tph (2 peak) Bishop 1 tph (2 peak) Bishop trains per Middlesbrough/Saltburn Auckland to Darlington/ Auckland to Darlington/ hour Middlesbrough/Saltburn Middlesbrough/Saltburn

54 Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 2 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in Newly introduced freight traffic trains per the Strategic Freight the Strategic Freight from Weardale Railway day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 1 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 1

User: 7

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

No schemes are currently planned for Control Period 4.

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Heighington Signalling DAE1 2019 Signalling interlocking In development mechanical interlocking refurbishment locking refurbishment refurbishment

Heighington Full renewal of DAE1 2019 Full renewal of MCB In development Station MCB MCB level level crossing Renewal crossing

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

55 SRS G.15 - Middlesbrough – Whitby

Route specification description

This 35-mile rural single track branch line leaves the Middlesbrough – Saltburn line at Guisborough Junction, a short distance to the east of Middlesbrough station. There are passing loops at Nunthorpe and Glaisdale and run-round loops at Battersby and Whitby. Due to the way in which the rail network in the area has evolved, the track layout requires all trains to reverse at Battersby.

There is a total of 16 stations on the route, most of which consist of one platform. Two platforms are provided at Nunthorpe and Glaisdale due to their role as passing places. Grosmont has a total of four platforms but only one forms part of the network, the remainder being owned and operated by the heritage North Yorkshire Moors Railway (NYMR).

The only track connection to the branch is at Grosmont with the NYMR and faces towards Whitby.

The basic train service throughout the route consists of four Northern Rail journeys each way per daybetween Middlesbrough and Whitby which are supplemented by seven further journeys each way between Middlesbrough and Nunthorpe, reflecting the greater population at this end of the route. Most of the Nunthorpe terminating journeys extend through to/from Newcastle via the Durham Coast.

56 During the summer months, NYMR operates on an open access basis three steam hauled journeys each way per day between Grosmont and Whitby which form an extension of their long-established heritage operation between Grosmont and Pickering, generally providing a through link Pickering – Whitby.

There is no regular freight traffic, the only non-passenger movements being rolling stock to or from NYMR.

In July 2005 the branch was one of the first to be designated a Community Rail line, under the aegis of the Esk Valley Community Rail Partnership.

There are listed station buildings at Whitby and Ruswarp; the latter is also in a Conservation Area.

The line runs for much of its distance through the North Yorkshire Moors National Park and thus serves many places of tourist interest as well as the coastal resort of Whitby. As such, it can be subject heavy peaks of demand during the summer months leading at times to considerable overcrowding of train services, whilst at other times demand can be quite low, especially at the smaller intermediate stations. With aspirations by NYMR to enhance their services in the Grosmont – Whitby corridor plus some evidence of increased interest by charter train operators, some changes to the fairly basic track layout at Whitby may need to be considered in the foreseeable future.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN634: Middlesbrough to Whitby description

Section start Guisborough Junction

Section end Whitby Station

Route 7 7 7 availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block (TCB) from (TCB) from (TCB) from Middlesbrough to Middlesbrough to Middlesbrough to Nunthorpe, No Nunthorpe, No Nunthorpe, No Signaller Signaller – Token Signaller – Token – Token Remote Remote (NSTR) Remote (NSTR) (NSTR) thereafter thereafter thereafter

Speed Predominantly 45mph Predominantly 45mph Predominantly 45mph

Electrification None None None

57 Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey and Middlesbrough to Whitby Middlesbrough to Whitby Middlesbrough to Whitby typical journey time 1 hour 27 minutes 1 hour 27 minutes 1 hour 27 minutes

Number of 4 tpd Middlesbrough to 4 tpd Middlesbrough to Whitby Tees Valley Metro project trains per Whitby may raise frequency 7 tpd Middlesbrough to hour between Middlesbrough 7 tpd Middlesbrough to Nunthorpe and Nunthorpe Nunthorpe 4 tpd Pickering to Whitby considerably 3 tpd Pickering to Whitby

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 0 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the Approximately 5 freight trains trains per the Strategic Strategic Freight Network per annum use this route day* Freight Network plan plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 2 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 5

User: 59

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Nunthorpe Signal box MBW1 2013 Signal box In development Signal Box refurbishment refurbishment Refurbishment

58 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation date

Middlesbrough Installation of DSN2, 2016 Signalling upgrade In development Modular modular signalling MBW1 Signalling

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

59 SRS G.16 - Northallerton - Stockton Cut Junction

Route specification description

This 16 mile non-electrified secondary route consists of two track railway throughout its length, except at Northallerton there are two tracks connecting it the East Coast Main Line (ECML) and Northallerton station and a further two tracks known as the Longlands Loop connecting it to the ECML south of the station at Longlands Junction forming an avoiding line around the station.

At the northern end, this line connects with the line from Darlington at Eaglescliffe South Junction and at Stockton Cut Junction with a line towards Stockton and that to Middlesbrough. It has no freight facilities apart from sidings at Northallerton and Eaglescliffe which are largely used for engineers’ purposes.

There are two stations; that at Yarm consists of two platforms whilst Eaglescliffe consists of a single island platform with two faces, facilitating interchange. The passenger service over the Northallerton – Eaglescliffe section consists of an hourly First TransPennine service between Middlesbrough and Manchester Airport via York and Leeds and four Grand Central trains each way per day between Sunderland and London King’s Cross. Between Eaglescliffe and Stockton Cut Junction there are additionally the Northern Rail services in the Darlington – Saltburn corridor, generally at a frequency of two trains each way per hour. There are substantial freight operations throughout, as the line forms a key link between the ECML and the numerous freight facilities on Teesside.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN627: Northallerton to Stockton Cut Junction description

Section start Northallerton Station

Section end Stockton Cut Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W10 W10

Signals Track Circuit Block TCB European Rail Traffic (TCB) Management System (ERTMS)

Speed Predominantly 70mph Predominantly 70mph There is some potential for linespeed improvements on this route

Electrification None None This route has been identified as a further option in the Electrification RUS

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Northallerton to Eaglescliffe Northallerton to Eaglescliffe Introduction of IEP and coupled with typical 18 minutes 18 minutes implementation of journey infrastructure time interventions can be expected to provide some improvement

Number 1tph Manchester Airport to 1tph Manchester Airport to 1tph Manchester Airport to Tees Valley Metro of trains Middlesbrough Middlesbrough Middlesbrough project aspires to per increase the hour 2tph (3 peak) Darlington to 2tph (3 peak) Darlington to 2tph (3 peak) Darlington to frequency of Middlesbrough/Saltburn Middlesbrough/Saltburn Middlesbrough/Saltburn Darlington to Middlesbrough 4tpd LDHS King’s Cross to 4tpd LDHS King’s Cross to 4tpd LDHS King’s Cross to service to 4tph Sunderland Sunderland Sunderland

61 Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 18 As per forecasts in the As per Busiest section is Eaglescliffe trains per Strategic Freight forecasts in to Stockton Cut Junction day* Network plan the Strategic Freight Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 3 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 3

User: 22

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Romanby Road Full renewal of LLP2 2012 Full renewal of In development MCB(CCTV) Renewal MCB(CCTV) MCB(CCTV) level level crossing crossing

Teesport W10 & Gauge DSN1/2, 2014 Accommodate the In development W12 gauge clearance from LEN3 carriage of deep sea clearance Teesport to container traffic and the ECML and swapbody traffic and other North provide diversionary East lines capability for such traffic using the ECML

62 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Low Gates Full renewal of LEN3 2016 Full renewal of MCB In development MCB Renewal MCB level level crossing crossing

Bowesfield Installation of LEN3, 2018 Upgraded signalling In development Modular modular DSN2, Signalling signalling BOH

Eaglescliffe Installation of LEN3, 2019 Upgraded signalling In development Modular modular DSN1 Signalling signalling

IEP Infrastructure LEN3 2019 Ability to IEP diversionary In development development/ works to accommodate IEP route enabling accommodate services works operation of IEP rolling stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

63 SRS G.17 - Stockton Cut Junction - Newcastle

Route specification description

This 43-mile secondary route consists of two track railway virtually throughout its length. It includes a 3-mile branch from Sunderland to South Hylton which is used only by Tyne & Wear Metro trains. It is non-electrified except for the South Hylton – Sunderland – Pelaw section which is electrified on the 1,500v DC OHL system of the Tyne & Wear Metro.

The line intersects at the south end with the Stockton Cut – Middlesbrough line at Bowesfield Junction and with the Stillington branch at Norton-on-Tees South and Norton-on-Tees East Junctions. At the northern end, it interfaces with the Tyne & Wear Metro network at Pelaw and with the East Coast Main Line (ECML) at Newcastle. There is also a connection to the currently disused Leamside route at Pelaw.

A diversity of markets is served by this line. Operating over almost the entire length is the generally hourly Northern Rail service between Middlesbrough and Hexham via Newcastle. Additionally there are four long distance high speed (LDHS) services operated by Grand Central from Sunderland southwards to London King’s Cross and between South Hylton and Pelaw high frequency Tyne & Wear Metro services. At Pelaw, the Metro trains leave Network Rail infrastructure and continue their journey on the Metro’s own dedicated network. There is also considerable freight traffic.

There are 18 stations on the route, of which ten are small stations with two platforms served only by Metro trains. Stockton, Seaton Carew and Seaham are two-platform stations, Billingham is a single island platform with two faces and Hartlepool consists of a single platform on the down line signalled reversibly plus a south- facing bay platform; these stations are served by heavy rail trains only. South Hylton is a single platform

64 used only by Metro trains, whilst Sunderland consists of a long, subsurface island platform with two faces each divided into two sections allowing use by both Metro and heavy rail services. Heworth station has four platforms, two of which are on Network Rail infrastructure and two on Metro infrastructure, providing interchange between Northern Rail and Metro services.

The line has numerous connections to freight facilities. At Stockton, there is a connection at Oxbridge sidings to a scrap metal recycling yard, whilst at Billingham Junction the freight branch to Haverton Hill and Seal Sands diverges, serving numerous, mainly petrochemical, terminals. At Greatham, there is a steelworks connection and at Seaton Snook Junction a branch line connects to Hartlepool power station. Arising from the proximity of the line to the coast there are several dock connections – namely to Hartlepool Docks, Seaham Harbour, Port of Sunderland and Tyne Dock. Tyne Dock in particular has tended to see strong growth in recent times. There is a branch line to an oil terminal at Jarrow.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN627: Stockton Cut Junction to Newcastle description

Section start Stockton Cut Junction

Section end Newcastle East Junction

Route 8 (except 5 across 8 (except 5 across 8 (except 5 across availability Newcastle High Level Newcastle High Newcastle High Level (RA) Bridge) Level Bridge) Bridge)

Gauge W8 (except W6 Norton W10 W10 East Junction to Boldon Junctions)

Signals Track Circuit Block TCB TCB (TCB), except Absolute Block (AB) around Norton-on- Tees Junctions and Billingham

Speed Predominantly 60mph Predominantly 60mph There is some potential south of Sunderland; south of Sunderland; for linespeed varies between 40mph varies between 40mph improvements on this and 70mph thereafter and 70mph thereafter route

Electrification None (except 1,500V None (except 1,500V The route between DC OHL from South DC OHL from South Stockton Cut Junction and Hylton to Pelaw Metro Hylton to Pelaw Metro Sunderland has been Junction) Junction) identified as a further option in the Electrification RUS

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Thornaby to Newcastle Thornaby to Newcastle There is some potential and typical for linespeed journey 1 hour 15 minutes 1 hour 15 minutes improvements on this time route

Number of 1 tph Middlesbrough to 1 tph Middlesbrough to 1 tph Middlesbrough to Tees Valley Metro project trains per Newcastle Newcastle Newcastle aspires to increase the hour frequency of Hartlepool to 4tph South Hylton to 4tph South Hylton to 4tph South Hylton to Middlesbrough/Nunthorpe Newcastle Airport Newcastle Airport Newcastle Airport service to 4tph

4tpd LDHS King’s Cross 4tpd LDHS King’s Cross 4tpd LDHS King’s to Sunderland to Sunderland Cross to Sunderland

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 9 As per forecasts in the As per Busiest section is Hartburn trains per Strategic Freight forecasts in Junction to Norton South day* Network plan the Strategic Junction Freight Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 7 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 3

User: 12

66 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Darlington – Capacity and DSN1/2/3, 2014 Doubling of local train In development Saltburn service line speed LEN3 frequency and improvements schemes and improved journey (Tees Valley new stations to times and Transport better serve performance Solutions) existing locations and new development sites

Teesport W10 & Gauge DSN1/2, 2014 Accommodate the In development W12 gauge clearance from LEN3 carriage of deep sea clearance Teesport to the container traffic and ECML and swapbody traffic and other North provide diversionary East lines capability for such traffic using the ECML

Billingham-on- Full renewal of LEN3 2014 Full renewal of MGB In development Tees MGB MGB level level crossing Renewal crossing

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation date

Pelaw Signalling transfer of FEP, 2018 Signalling transfer In development Recontrol control LEN3, of control JAW2

67 Ryhope Refurbishment of HNB, 2019 Refurbishment of In development Grange mechanical locking LEN3 mechanical locking mechanical locking refurbishment

Norton-on-Tees Installation of LEN3 2019 Upgraded In development Modular modular signalling signalling Signalling

IEP Infrastructure works LEN3 2019 Ability to In development development/ to accommodate accommodate IEP enabling operation of IEP services works rolling stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

68 SRS G.18 - Darlington - Eaglescliffe South Junction

Route specification description

This eight mile section of non-electrified secondary route leaves the East Coast Main Line (ECML) by a single lead connection at Darlington South Junction. It is double track throughout with three stations at Dinsdale, Teesside Airport and Allens West each of which consists of two platforms. There is a private siding at Maidendale (between Darlington and Dinsdale) and a disused freight siding at Allens West.

The route forms a key link for passenger and freight services between the ECML at Darlington and Teesside. The passenger service consists of two stopping trains each way per hour operated by Northern Rail, some of which extend to/from Bishop Auckland. Very few trains stop at Teesside Airport due to low demand.

Together with the line onwards to Middlesbrough and Saltburn the line is the subject of proposals for Tees Valley Metro, which would potentially see infrastructure improvements leading to improved train service performance and frequency, as well as new stations.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN631: Darlington to Eaglescliffe South Junction description

Section start Darlington South Junction

Section end Eaglescliffe South Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8

Signals Track Circuit Block TCB TCB (TCB)

Speed Varies from 30mph to Varies from 30mph to There is some potential 60mph 60mph for linespeed improvements on this route

Electrification None None None

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey and Darlington to Darlington to Eaglescliffe There is some potential The Tees Valley Metro typical Eaglescliffe for linespeed project aspires to journey time 14 minutes improvements on this increase linespeeds on 14 minutes route this SRS in order to reduce journey times between Darlington and Saltburn to 48 minutes (from the current 53)

Number of 2tph (3 peak) Darlington 2tph (3 peak) Darlington 2tph (3 peak) Tees Valley Metro project trains per to to Darlington to aspires to increase the hour Middlesbrough/Saltburn Middlesbrough/Saltburn Middlesbrough/Saltburn frequency of Darlington to Middlesbrough service to 4tph

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 2 As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

70 Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 1 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 1

User: 7

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Darlington – Capacity and line DSN1/2/3, 2014 Doubling of local train Third party In development Saltburn speed schemes LEN3 frequency and improved scheme service and new stations journey times and improvements to better serve performance (Tees Valley existing locations Transport and new Solutions) development sites

Urlay Nook Full MGB level DSN1 2014 Full MGB level crossing In development MGB crossing renewal renewal Renewal

Teesport Gauge clearance DSN1/2, 2014 Accommodate the In development W10 & W12 from Teesport to LEN3 carriage of deep sea gauge the ECML and container traffic and clearance other North East swapbody traffic and lines provide diversionary capability for such traffic using the ECML

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

No schemes are currently planned for Control Period 5.

71 SRS G.19 - Stockton Cut Junction - Saltburn

Route specification description

This non-electrified secondary route extends for approximately 19 miles via Middlesbrough to its terminal point at Saltburn. It is a two track railway for much of its length with additional goods lines in the Thornaby – Middlesbrough – Whitehouse and South Bank – Lackenby corridors. There is a large marshalling yard and locomotive depot complex at Tees Yard, now partly disused and subject to rationalisation proposals, numerous private siding facilities between Middlesbrough and Redcar predominantly serving the steel and chemical industries, together with some smaller passenger and freight sidings adjacent to Middlesbrough station. A connection exists at Grangetown into Tees Dock. There is a down loop at Redcar and a small sidings complex at Saltburn, the latter mainly used in connection with charter trains and engineering traffic.

The passenger branch line to Whitby diverges at Guisborough Junction (near Middlesbrough) and the freight branch to Carlin How diverges at Saltburn West Junction. The latter serves a steelworks at Crag Hall and a potash mine at Carlin How. The line is owned and operated by Network Rail for the first seven miles to Crag Hall but beyond that is a private railway controlled by the potash mining company.

The line has nine passenger stations, most of which consist of two platforms. Thornaby has a single island platform with two faces, facilitating easy interchange. Middlesbrough has additional flexibility in the form of reversible working and multiple platform occupation, whilst Saltburn consists of two terminal bays.

The heaviest used section of the route is between Stockton Cut Junction and Middlesbrough, since this accommodates heavy freight traffic to and from the Teesside industrial and port area, the Northern Rail passenger services between Darlington and Saltburn and between Hexham/Newcastle and Middlesbrough, plus the hourly First TransPennine service between Middlesbrough and Manchester Airport via

72 Northallerton. Between Middlesbrough and Guisborough Junction the line also accommodates the trains to/from the Whitby branch. Beyond Redcar Ore Terminal Junction traffic becomes lighter, being confined to two passenger trains per hour on the Darlington – Saltburn service and freight traffic for Crag Hall and Carlin How.

As described for SRS G.18, the line is the subject of proposals for Tees Valley Metro which envisage upgrading of the local passenger train service.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN632: Stockton Cut Junction to Saltburn description LN644: Hartburn Curve

Section start Stockton Cut Junction

Section end Saltburn Station

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W9/W10 from W9/W10 from Stockton Stockton Cut Junction Cut Junction to to Teesport, W8 Teesport, W8 thereafter thereafter

Signals Track Circuit Block TCB TCB Route from Stockton Cut (TCB), except for Junction to Middlesbrough Absolute Block (AB) may be covered by ERTMS around Redcar East within 30 years

Speed Generally 55mph or Generally 55mph or There is some potential 60mph 60mph for linespeed improvements on this route

Electrification None None The route from Stockton Cut Junction to Middlesbrough has been identified as a further option in the Electrification RUS

73 Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Eaglescliffe to Saltburn Eaglescliffe to Saltburn There is some potential for The Tees Valley Metro and linespeed improvements on project aspires to increase 41 minutes 41 minutes typical this route linespeeds on this SRS in journey order to reduce journey time times between Darlington and Saltburn to 48 minutes (from the current 53)

Number 2tph (3 peak) Darlington 2tph (3 peak) 2tph (3 peak) Darlington to Tees Valley Metro project of trains to Darlington to Middlesbrough/Saltburn aspires to increase the per Middlesbrough/Saltburn Middlesbrough/Saltburn frequency of Darlington to 1tph Manchester Airport to hour Middlesbrough/Saltburn 1tph Manchester Airport 1tph Manchester Middlesbrough service to 4tph to Middlesbrough Airport to 1tph Middlesbrough to Middlesbrough 1tph Middlesbrough to Newcastle Newcastle 1tph Middlesbrough to Newcastle Possible IEP services from King’s Cross to Middlesbrough

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 19 As per forecasts in the As per Busiest section is trains per Strategic Freight forecasts in Whitehouse Junction to day* Network plan the Strategic South Bank Junction Freight Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 4 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 5

74 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Darlington – Capacity and DSN1/2/3, 2014 Doubling of local train In development Saltburn service line speed LEN3 frequency and improvements schemes and improved journey (Tees Valley new stations times and Transport to better serve performance Solutions) existing locations and new development sites

Teesport W10 & Gauge DSN1/2, 2014 Accommodate the In development W12 gauge clearance LEN3 carriage of deep sea clearance from Teesport container traffic and to the ECML swapbody traffic and and other provide diversionary North East capability for such lines traffic using the ECML

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Middlesbrough Modular Installation of DSN2, 2016 Signalling upgrade In development Signalling modular MBW1 signalling

Tees Yard Modular Installation of DSN2, 2017 Signalling upgrade In development Signalling modular TSY signalling

Crag Hall Modular Installation of SSK1 2017 Signalling upgrade In development Signalling modular signalling

Saltburn West Junction Installation of DSN2 2017 Signalling upgrade In development Modular Signalling modular signalling

75 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Redcar Modular Installation of DSN2 2018 Signalling upgrade In development Signalling modular signalling

Todd Point Modular Installation of DSN2 2019 Signalling upgrade In development Signalling modular signalling

IEP development/ Infrastructure DSN2 2019 Ability to In development enabling works works to accommodate IEP accommodate services operation of IEP rolling stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

76 SRS G.20 - Doncaster – Lincoln

Route specification description

This 33-mile double track non-electrified secondary route forms the northern part of the GN & GE Joint Line which in total extends from Peterborough via Spalding and Lincoln to Doncaster Flyover Junction. It intersects at Trent West Junction with the line to Retford and Sheffield, at Gainsborough Trent Junction with the line to Barnetby via Brigg and, at the Lincoln end, at West Holmes Junction with the line from Newark to Wrawby Junction. There is also a single-track connection near Lincoln from Pyewipe Junction to Boultham Junction giving a direct link towards Newark avoiding Lincoln station.

The line is served throughout by East Midlands Trains services operating on the Doncaster – Lincoln – Peterborough axis at a frequency of five trains each way per day. Between Lincoln and Gainsborough these are joined by Northern Rail’s generally hourly service between Lincoln and Sheffield. There is also freight traffic, again predominantly in the Lincoln – Gainsborough corridor, including that associated with the power station at West Burton.

There are two stations at Saxilby and Gainsborough Lea Road, each consisting of two platforms, a small freight siding complex at Gainsborough serving an oil terminal an up and down goods loop at Beckingham (currently disused) and some freight sidings at Walkeringham.

An aspiration exists for a new station at Finningley to serve Robin Hood Airport Doncaster Sheffield (RHADS) but to attract substantial traffic it would be likely to require a significant increase in the present

77 service level of five trains per day which in turn potentially raises issues about pathing and capacity at Doncaster.

The entire GN/GE Joint Line between Peterborough, Doncaster and Lincoln is currently the subject of an upgrading scheme which will address various capacity, linespeed and loading gauge issues allowing the route to be used as an alternative to the ECML for freight traffic.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN170: Doncaster to Lincoln description

Section start Black Carr Junction

Section end West Holmes Junction

Route 8 10 10 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 (except W9 W9/W10 W9/W10 Gainsborough Lea Road to Pyewipe Junction)

Signals Track Circuit Block TCB TCB (TCB), except Absolute Block (AB) Beckingham to Saxilby

Speed Predominantly 60 mph Predominantly 75mph Predominantly 75mph

Electrification None None None

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey and Doncaster to Lincoln Journey time will be Journey time will be typical reduced as a result of reduced as a result 51 minutes journey time linespeed increase of linespeed due to GN/GE project increase due to GN/GE project

Number of 1tph Sheffield to Lincoln 1tph Sheffield to 1tph Sheffield to It may be possible to trains per Lincoln Lincoln increase passenger 5tpd Doncaster to Lincoln hour services following the 5+ tpd Doncaster to 5+ tpd Doncaster to infrastructure improvements Lincoln Lincoln brought about by the GN/GE project

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 8 As per forecasts in the As per Pyewipe Junction to trains per Strategic Freight forecasts in Gainsborough Trent day* Network plan the Strategic Junctions is busiest section Freight Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 9 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 3

User: 28

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Stow Park MGW Full renewal of SPD3 2013 Full renewal of MGW In development Renewal MGW level level crossing crossing

Capacity relief Enhancement WEB, 2014 Increased capacity In development Peterborough to of the GN/GE SPD1/2/3/4 and improved Doncaster Joint Line via performance, plus 7 Spalding and Day Railway Lincoln opportunities

GN/GE (Pyewipe Increase BHP, 2014 Improved freight In development Junction to gauge at SPD3/4 capacity; new Doncaster) gauge northern end diversionary route clearance of GN/GE line to W10 (as per previous 3rd party project)

79 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Stow Park Modular Installation of SPD3 2016 Signalling In development Signalling modular signalling upgrade

Saxilby Modular Installation of SPD3 2018 Signalling In development Signalling modular signalling upgrade

Gainsborough Trent Installation of MAC3, 2019 Signalling In development Junction Modular modular signalling SPD3/4 upgrade Signalling

IEP development/ Infrastructure SPD3/4 2019 Ability to In development enabling works works to accommodate accommodate IEP services operation of IEP rolling stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

80 SRS G.21 - Newark - Wrawby Junction

Route specification description

This 46-mile non-electrified secondary route consists of two tracks almost throughout its length. There is a short four-track section between West Holmes and East Holmes Junctions and another through Lincoln station. The line interfaces end-on at Newark with the Newark – Nottingham line and there is also a single tack spur providing at connection with the East Coast Main Line (ECML) at Newark Northgate. At Lincoln, there are interfaces with the GN & GE Joint Line both towards Peterborough and towards Doncaster whilst at Wrawby Junction this line joins with those from Doncaster via Scunthorpe and from Gainsborough via Brigg.

The train service is most intensive at over the Lincoln – Newark section, where there is an hourly passenger train service between Lincoln and Nottingham, together with the broadly two-hourly Newark Northgate – Grimsby via Market Rasen service plus with two long distance high speed (LDHS) services each way to/from London. Within the Lincoln station area there are additionally the GN/GE Joint Line services, but beyond Lincoln the passenger service consists only of the Newark – Grimsby service. There are freight operations throughout reflecting that this route is a link from the intensively used port complex at Immingham to terminals in the Midlands.

There are stations at Collingham, Swinderby, Hykeham, Lincoln and Market Rasen which consist of two platforms apart from Lincoln which has three through platforms and two bays facing towards Grimsby/Spalding. There are listed station buildings at Lincoln and Market Rasen; the former adjoins a Conservation Area. A private siding exists for petroleum traffic at Welton and an engineers’ siding at Wickenby. There are few other features of note, although the line has a large number of level crossings as a result of the largely flat land through which it passes.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN206: Newark to Lincoln description LN200: Lincoln to Wrawby Junction

Section start Newark North Gate Station

Section end Wrawby Junction

Route 8 8 (except 10 between 8 (except 10 between availability West Holmes West Holmes Junction (RA) Junction and Pelham and Pelham Junction) Junction)

Gauge W7 (Newark North W9/W10 (Newark W9/W10 (Newark North Gate to West Holmes North Gate to Pelham Gate to Pelham Junction), W8 (West Junction), W8 (Pelham Junction), W8 (Pelham Holmes Junction to Junction to Wrawby Junction to Wrawby Wrawby Junction) Junction) Junction)

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block (TCB) from Newark to (TCB) from Newark to (TCB) from Newark to Langworth SB; Langworth SB; Langworth SB; Absolute Block (AB) Absolute Block (AB) Absolute Block (AB) thereafter thereafter thereafter

Speed Predominantly 70 mph Predominantly 70 mph There is some potential from Newark to from Newark to for linespeed Lincoln; predominantly Lincoln; predominantly improvements on this 75mph from Lincoln to 75mph from Lincoln to route Wrawby Junction Wrawby Junction

Electrification None None The route between Newark and Lincoln has been identified as a further option in the Electrification RUS

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Newark North Gate to Newark North Gate to There is some potential and Barnetby Barnetby for linespeed typical improvements on this 1 hour 5 minutes 1 hour 5 minutes journey route time

Number 1tph Leicester/ 1-2tph Leicester/ 2tph Leicester/ If Newark Flat Crossing is of trains Nottingham to Lincoln Nottingham to Lincoln Nottingham to Lincoln replaced with a bridge it per may be possible to 1tph Grimsby/Lincoln to 1tph Grimsby/Lincoln to 1tph Grimsby/Lincoln to hour double the service Newark North Gate (7tpd Newark North Gate (7tpd Newark North Gate (7tpd frequency between Lincoln to Grimsby) Lincoln to Grimsby) Lincoln to Grimsby) Lincoln and Nottingham

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 12 As per forecasts in the As per forecasts Busiest section is Pelham trains per Strategic Freight in the Strategic Street Junction to West day* Network plan Freight Network Holmes Junction plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 9 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 26

User: 50

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation date

Thorpe-on-the- Full renewal of AHB NOB1 2014 Full renewal of AHB In development Hill AHBC level crossing level crossing Renewal

Newark to Closure or risk NOB1 2014 Increased capacity, In development Lincoln Level mitigation measures at improved safety and Crossing level crossings that will performance Closure or become a high risk Risk Mitigation with an increase in train movements

83 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Newark to W10 Gauge NOB1 2015 To accommodate In development Doncaster via clearance of the the carriage of Gainsborough route between deep sea container W10 Gauge Newark, traffic as an Clearance Gainsborough and alternative route to Doncaster in the East Coast connection with Main Line between port developments Newark and at Felixstowe and Doncaster Bathside Bay

South Scarle Full renewal of NOB1 2015 Full renewal of In development AHBC Renewal AHB level crossing AHB level crossing

Brayford Full renewal of SPD3 2017 Full renewal of In development MCB(CCTV) MCB(CCTV) level MCB(CCTV) level Renewal crossing crossing

Newark Flyover Replacement of ECM1, 2018 Improved In development Newark Flat NOB1, performance, Crossing with a NSE reduced journey bridge carrying the times and reduced Nottingham & fuel consumption Lincoln line over on the ECML; the ECML improved performance and increased capacity on the Nottingham & Lincoln line

Collingham & Full renewal of NOB1 2018 Full renewal of In development Swinderby AHB level AHB level AHBC crossings crossings Renewals

Eagle Full renewal of NOB1 2019 Full renewal of In development Barnsdale and AHB level AHB level Eagle & Thorpe crossings crossings AHBC Renewals

Crankley Point Full renewal of NOB1 2019 Full renewal of In development UWC Renewal UWC level crossing UWC level crossing

84 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

IEP Infrastructure works NOB1/2, 2019 Ability to In development development/ to accommodate BHP accommodate IEP enabling operation of IEP services works rolling stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

85 SRS G.22 - Gainsborough - Wrawby Junction

Route specification description

This 21 mile rural route consists of a mixture of single and double track. The double track runs from Gainsborough Trent Junction to a point approximately one mile east of Gainsborough Central station and from Kirton Lime Sidings signal box to Brigg; there is also a passing loop at Northorpe.

The line is predominantly used by freight traffic and was recently the subject of a major upgrade programme to provide a fully effective additional link westwards from Immingham to relieve pressure on the alternative routes via Scunthorpe and via Market Rasen. The passenger service is limited to three trains each way on Saturdays only between Cleethorpes and Sheffield.

There are three stations, at Gainsborough Central, Kirton Lindsey and Brigg. Kirton Lindsey has a single platform whilst the others have two platforms. There are no freight sidings/terminals on this line which serves the freight markets only by providing a through route.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN736: Gainsborough to Wrawby Junction description

Section start Gainsborough Trent East Junction

Section end Wrawby Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block (TCB), except (TCB), except (TCB), except Absolute Absolute Block (AB) Absolute Block (AB) Block (AB) around around Brigg and around Brigg and Brigg and Gainsborough Central Gainsborough Central Gainsborough Central stations stations stations

Speed Predominantly 60 mph Predominantly 60 mph Predominantly 60 mph

Electrification None None None

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey and Gainsborough Central to Gainsborough Central Gainsborough typical Barnetby to Barnetby Central to Barnetby journey time 36 minutes 36 minutes 36 minutes

Number of Saturday only: 3tpd Saturday only: 3tpd Saturday only: 3tpd trains per Cleethorpes to Sheffield Cleethorpes to Cleethorpes to hour Sheffield Sheffield

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 21 As per forecasts in the As per forecasts Gainsborough Central to trains per Strategic Freight in the Strategic Kirton Lime Sidings is day* Network plan Freight Network busiest section plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 3 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 2

User: 12

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

No schemes are currently planned for Control Period 4.

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation date

Brigg MGL Full renewal of MGL MAC3 2015 Full renewal of MGL In development Renewal level crossing level crossing

Gainsborough Installation of MAC3 2019 Signalling upgrade In development Central Modular modular signalling Signalling

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

88 SRS G.23 - Lincoln - Werrington Junction

Route specification description

This 51-mile secondary route consists of non-electrified double track throughout its length. It connects with the East Coast Main Line (ECML) at Werrington Junction, with single track spurs leading to Sleaford station at Sleaford South and Sleaford North Junctions, and at Lincoln with the line from Wrawby Junction (see SRS G.21). It forms the southern part of the GN/GE Joint Line (see SRS G.20).

The passenger service consists of a broadly hourly local stopping service, restricted to a relatively short operating day between Spalding and Sleaford due to the fact that over that section the signal boxes are staffed on a ‘single shift’ basis to contain costs. There is very limited freight usage.

There are stations at Spalding, Ruskington and Metheringham, each of which has two platforms. One platform at Spalding station is signalled reversibly, allowing terminating trains in the early morning and evening from/to Peterborough to turn back without the need to shunt from down line to up line and giving easier passenger access.

All passenger trains in normal working use the spurs to reach Sleaford station and as a result the direct route avoiding the station is currently out of use on the down line. There are no freight sidings/terminals on the route apart from a small complex of sidings at Spalding which normally are used only for engineers’ trains or on-track machines. However, there is a proposal to create a major rail-linked distribution hub for food products on which discussions continue with stakeholders.

As with the Doncaster – Lincoln portion of the GN/GE Joint Line, this route is currently the subject of a major upgrade programme as described under SRS G.20 and this will also address such issues as ‘single shift’

89 signalling and the short section of down line out of use as part of creating a viable all-day alternative route to the ECML for freight traffic whilst maintaining fully the present passenger capability.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN170: Lincoln to Werrington Junction description

Section start Pelham Street Junction

Section end Werrington Junction

Route 8 10 10 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W9/W10 W9/W10

Signals Predominantly TCB TCB Absolute Block (AB) with some Track Circuit Block (TCB)

Speed Predominantly 55 mph Predominantly 75mph Predominantly 75mph

Electrification None None None

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey and Peterborough to Lincoln via Journey time will be Journey time will be typical Spalding and Sleaford reduced as a result of reduced as a result journey time linespeed increase of linespeed 1 hour 26 minutes due to GN/GE project increase due to GN/GE project

Number of 8 tpd Peterborough to 13+ tpd Peterborough 13+ tpd It may be possible to trains per Lincoln via Spalding and to Spalding/Lincoln Peterborough to increase passenger hour Sleaford Spalding/Lincoln services following the infrastructure improvements 5 tpd Peterborough to brought about by the Spalding only GN/GE project

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 1 As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in Sleaford North trains per Strategic Freight the Strategic Junction to Pelham day* Network plan Freight Network Street Junction is plan busiest section

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 21 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 8

User: 58

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Gosberton Signalling Signalling SPD1 2012 Interlocking Under Renewals interlocking renewal with construction renewals linespeed increases

Blankney MGW Full renewal of SPD2 2013 Full renewal of In development Renewal MGW level MGW level crossing crossing

Mill Green Modular Installation of SPD1 2013 Signalling upgrade In development Signalling modular signalling

Capacity relief Enhancement WEB, 2014 Increased capacity In development Peterborough to of the GN/GE SPD1/2/3/4 and improved Doncaster Joint Line via performance, plus Spalding and 7 Day Railway Lincoln opportunities

91 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Sleaford North Installation of SNW, 2017 Signalling upgrade In development Modular modular signalling SPD2 Signalling

Malting Lane Full renewal of SPD1 2017 Full renewal of In development AHBC Renewal AHBC level AHBC level crossing crossing

GN/GE Alterations to ECM1, 2018 Increased capacity In development Southern platform/junction WEB for both passenger Access layout and/or and freight (Werrington possible services through Junction) construction of Peterborough, and avoiding line reduced journey times for passenger services stopping at Peterborough

Peterborough Provision of EMP, 2018 Maximisation of In development to GN/GE independent access ECM1, capacity Southern to GN/GE Joint Line WEB Access for trains from Ely- March- Peterborough line

Folly Bank Full renewal of WEB 2018 Full renewal of In development AHBC Renewal AHBC level AHBC level crossing crossing

Blotoft Modular Installation of SPD1 2019 Signalling upgrade In development Signalling modular signalling

IEP Infrastructure works WEB, 2019 Ability to In development development/ to accommodate SPD1/2/3 accommodate IEP enabling operation of IEP services works rolling stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

92 SRS G.90 - Stillington Branch

Route specification description

The Stillington Branch runs for almost 11 miles from Norton Junctions (just north of Stockton) to Ferryhill South Junction (on the ECML between Darlington and Durham). It has two tracks along its whole length. It is normally a freight-only line, but can be used as a diversionary route for ECML passenger services between Northallerton and Durham (thereby avoiding Darlington). There are no stations or notable facilities along its length.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN646: Norton South Junction to Ferryhill South Junction description

Section start Norton-on-Tees South Junction

Section end Ferryhill South Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8

Signals Absolute Block (AB) Absolute Block (AB) Absolute Block (AB)

Speed Varies between Varies between Raise linespeed to 40mph and 50mph 40mph and 50mph highest possible in line with infrastructure characteristics and capability of rolling stock

Electrification None None None

Passenger train service level Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey and N/A N/A N/A typical journey time

Number of N/A N/A N/A It has been suggested that trains per the Stillington Branch may hour be used for a faster Middlesbrough to Newcastle passenger service in the long term

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 3 6 7 trains per day*

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 1 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 10

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

No schemes are currently planned for Control Period 4.

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation date

Norton-on-Tees Installation of LEN3, 2018 Signalling upgrade In development West Modular modular signalling STF, Signalling NWE

IEP Infrastructure works STF 2019 Ability to IEP In development development/ to accommodate accommodate IEP diversionary enabling operation of IEP services route works rolling stock

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

95 SRS G.91 - Blyth & Tyne Network

Route specification description

The Blyth & Tyne Network comprises a group of linked freight-only lines in North Tyneside and Northumberland, with a total length of approximately 32 route miles. There is a mixture of single and double track sections. The network intersects with the East Coast Main Line at Benton Junction, Morpeth Junction, Morpeth North Junction, and Butterwell Junction. These lines thereby connect the ECML with the following facilities:  Isabella Colliery in Blyth  Cambois Power Station in North Blyth  The Alcan import berth in North Blyth  Lynemouth Colliery  Alcan’s aluminium works at Lynemouth

96 Section 1: Benton North Junction - Earsdon Junction (BNE)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN694: Benton North Junction - Earsdon Junction description

Section start Benton North Junction

Section end (Former) Earsdon Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block (TCB) (TCB) (TCB)

Speed 45 mph 45 mph 45 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 6 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 3

Section 2: Bedlington Junction - Woodhorn Colliery (BWC)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN702: Bedlington Junction - Woodhorn Colliery description

Section start Alcan Power Station

Section end Bedlington Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8

Signals Absolute Block (AB) Absolute Block (AB) Absolute Block (AB)

Speed 40 mph 40 mph 40 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 5 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 4 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 1

User: 4

Section 3: Ashington Junction - Butterwell Junction (BWO1)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN700: Ashington Junction - Butterwell Junction description

Section start Ashington Junction

Section end Signal B1

Route availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals

Speed

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 0 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

Section 4: Ashington Junction - Butterwell Junction (BWO2)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN700: Ashington Junction - Butterwell Junction description

Section start Butterwell Junction

Section end Signal B1

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block (TCB) (TCB) (TCB)

Speed 15 mph 15 mph 15 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 0 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

100

Section 5: Earsdon Junction - Morpeth North Junction (EJM)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN694: Earsdon Junction - Morpeth North Junction description

Section start (Former) Earsdon Junction

Section end Morpeth North Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8

Signals Mainly Track Circuit Mainly Track Circuit Mainly Track Circuit Block (TCB) with some Block (TCB) with some Block (TCB) with some Absolute Block (AB) Absolute Block (AB) Absolute Block (AB)

Speed 45 mph 45 mph 45 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 5 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 4 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 6

User: 12

101

Section 6: Hepscott Junction - Morpeth Junction (HJM)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN696: Hepscott Junction - Morpeth Junction description

Section start Hepscott Junction

Section end Morpeth Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block (TCB) (TCB) (TCB)

Speed 45 mph 45 mph 45 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 1

User: 0

102

Section 7: Newsham North Junction - Isabella Colliery (ISC)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN704: Newsham North Junction - Isabella Colliery description

Section start Newsham North Junction

Section end Isabella Colliery (UK Coal)

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge

Signals One Train Working One Train Working One Train Working (OTS) (OTS) (OTS)

Speed 25 mph 25 mph 25 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 2 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

103

Section 8: Marchey House Junction - Winning Colliery Junction (MWJ)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN708: Marchey House Junction - Winning Colliery Junction description

Section start Marchey's House Junction

Section end Winning Crossing Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals Absolute Block (AB) Absolute Block (AB) Absolute Block (AB)

Speed 20 mph 20 mph 20 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 1

104

Section 9: West Sleekburn Junction - North Blyth (WSB)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN706: West Sleekburn Junction - North Blyth description

Section start West Sleekburn Junction

Section end North Blyth (Alcan Import Berth)

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals Absolute Block (AB) Absolute Block (AB) Absolute Block (AB) with some One Train with some One Train with some One Train Working (OTNS) Working (OTNS) Working (OTNS)

Speed 35 mph 35 mph 35 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 2 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 3 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 2

105 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

Winning MGB Full renewal of WSB 2013 Full renewal of MGB level In development Renewal MGB level crossing crossing

Bedlington Refurbishment EJM 2014 Refurbishment of signal In development South Signal of signal box box Box Refurbishment

Newsham Refurbishment EJM 2014 Refurbishment of signal In development Signal Box of signal box box Refurbishment

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation date

North Installation of BWC 2015 Signalling upgrade In development Seaton modular signalling Modular Signalling

Bedlington Installation of EJM 2016 Signalling upgrade In development South modular signalling Modular Signalling

Bedlington Installation of BWC, 2016 Signalling upgrade In development North modular signalling EJM, Modular WSB Signalling

North Full renewal of MCB BWC 2018 Full renewal of MCB In development Seaton level crossing level crossing MCB Renewal

106 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation date

Marcheys Full renewal of MCB BWC 2018 Full renewal of MCB In development House level crossing level crossing MCB Renewal

Marcheys Installation of BWC, 2019 Signalling upgrade In development House modular signalling MWJ Modular Signalling

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

107 SRS G.98 - Freight Trunk Routes

Route specification description

This SRS consists of many unrelated freight routes, with a total length of about 45 route miles. The map and tables below provide greater detail, but the SRS can be summarised by stating that it facilitates the following connections:  The Durham Coast line at Boldon to Tyne Docks  The Newark to Lincoln line to the Lincoln to Doncaster line (thereby avoiding central Lincoln)  The Durham Coast line at Pelaw to Wardley Opencast Disposal and Shell’s facility at Jarrow  The Durham Coast line near Billingham to numerous facilities on North Teesside (including Hartlepool Nuclear Power Station)  The Durham Coast line at Hartlepool to Hartlepool Docks  The Durham Coast line at Sunderland to Sunderland South Dock  The ECML south of Northallerton to the Northallerton to Eaglescliffe line (thereby avoiding Northallerton station)  The Darlington to Saltburn line to DB Schenker’s goods yard at Middlesbrough  The ECML south of Newcastle to the Newcastle to Carlisle line (thereby avoiding central Newcastle)  The Durham Coast line at Pelaw to the Tyne & Wear Metro system  The ECML north of Northallerton to the Wensleydale Railway  The Darlington to Saltburn line to Boulby potash mine and Skinningrove steelworks  The Darlington to Saltburn line to ICI’s facility at Wilton  The Durham Coast line at Dawdon to DB Schenker and Lafarge’s facilities at Seaham

108

Section 1: Boldon Colliery Junction - Green Lane Junction (BGE)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN666: Boldon Colliery Junction - Green Lane Junction description

Section start Boldon West Junction

Section end Green Lane Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8

Signals Mainly Track Circuit Mainly Track Circuit Mainly Track Circuit Block (TCB) with some Block (TCB) with some Block (TCB) with some One Train Working One Train Working One Train Working (OTS) (OTS) (OTS)

Speed 25 mph 25 mph 25 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates throughout As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

109

Section 2: Boultham Junction - Pyewipe Junction (BHP)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN215: Boultham Junction - Pyewipe Junction description

Section start Boultham Junction

Section end Pyewipe Junction

Route 8 10 10 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W9/W10 W9/W10

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block (TCB) (TCB) (TCB)

Speed 30 mph 30 mph 30 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 4 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 1

110

Section 3: Boldon East Junction - Boldon North Junction (BNW)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN664: Boldon East Junction - Boldon North Junction description

Section start Boldon East Junction

Section end Boldon North Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block (TCB) (TCB) (TCB)

Speed 15 mph 15 mph 15 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates throughout As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

111

Section 4: New Ground Sidings (Seaton Carew) (CLH1)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN627: New Ground Sidings (Seaton Carew) description

Section start Cliff House Junction

Section end Stranton Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block (TCB) (TCB) (TCB)

Speed 15 mph 15 mph 15 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates throughout As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

112

Section 5: Leamside Line (Ferryhill to Pelaw) (FEP)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN672: Leamside Line (Ferryhill to Pelaw) The whole line from Ferryhill description to Pelaw may be reinstated within 30 Years Section start Wardley Opencast Disposal

Section end Pelaw Junction

Route 8 8 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W6/W7 W6/W7 W9/W10

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block European Rail Traffic (TCB) (TCB) Management System (ERTMS)

Speed 40 mph 40 mph 70+ mph

Electrification None None 25kV AC OHL

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates throughout As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

113

Section 6: Green Lane - Tyne Dock (GLT)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN666: Green Lane - Tyne Dock description

Section start Green Lane Junction

Section end Port of Tyne Authority

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8

Signals One Train Working One Train Working One Train Working (OTS) (OTS) (OTS)

Speed 15 mph 15 mph 15 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates throughout As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

114

Section 7: Ryhope Grange Sidings (HEM)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN627: Ryhope Grange Sidings description

Section start Ryhope Grange Junction

Section end Ryhope Grange Sidings

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block (TCB) (TCB) (TCB)

Speed 15 mph 15 mph 15 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates throughout As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

115

Section 8: Hartlepool Docks (HLD)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route Hartlepool Docks description

Section start Lancaster Road Junction

Section end Victoria Harbour

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals

Speed 15 mph 15 mph 15 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates throughout As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

116

Section 9: Hendon Branch (Londonderry Sidings) (HNB)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN662: Hendon Branch (Londonderry Sidings) description

Section start Ryhope Grange Junction

Section end Sunderland South Dock

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals Mainly One Train Mainly One Train Mainly One Train Working (OTS) with Working (OTS) with Working (OTS) with some Track Circuit some Track Circuit some Track Circuit Block (TCB) Block (TCB) Block (TCB)

Speed 15 mph 15 mph 15 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates throughout As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 1

117

Section 10: Pelaw Junction - Jarrow Terminal (JAW)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN670: Pelaw Junction - Jarrow Terminal description

Section start Pelaw Junction

Section end Jarrow Terminal

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8

Signals One Train Working One Train Working One Train Working (OTN(S)) (OTN(S)) (OTN(S))

Speed 40 mph 40 mph 40 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 6 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 1

118

Section 11: Longland Loop Junction – Northallerton East Junction (LLP)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN627: Longland Loop Junction – Northallerton East Junction description

Section start Longland Loop Junction

Section end Northallerton East Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W9/W10 W9/W10

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block European Rail Traffic (TCB) (TCB) Management System (ERTMS)

Speed 50 mph 50 mph 50 mph

Electrification None None None This route may be electrified with 25kV AC OHL

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates throughout As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 2 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 1

User: 0

119

Section 12: Low Fell Junction - Norwood Junction (NLF)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN684: Low Fell Junction - Norwood Junction description

Section start Low Fell Junction

Section end Norwood Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W7 W7 W7

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block ERTMS (TCB) (TCB)

Speed 35 mph 35 mph 35 mph

Electrification 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL 25kV AC OHL

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 10 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

120

Section 13: Pelaw Loops (PDL/PUL)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN629 & LN630: Pelaw Loops (PDL/PUL) description

Section start Pelaw Metro Junction

Section end Pelaw South/North Junction

Route availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block (TCB) (TCB) (TCB)

Speed 50 mph (Down); 50 mph (Down); 50 mph (Down); 30 mph (Up) 30 mph (Up) 30 mph (Up)

Electrification 1500V DC OHL 1500V DC OHL 1500V DC OHL

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 0 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

121

Section 14: Billingham Junction - Port Clarence (POC1)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN652: Billingham Junction - Port Clarence description

Section start Billingham Junction

Section end Phillips Siding Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals Mainly No Signaller Mainly No Signaller Mainly No Signaller Token (NST) with Token (NST) with Token (NST) with some some Absolute Block some Absolute Block Absolute Block (AB) (AB) (AB)

Speed 30 mph 30 mph 30 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 1 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

122

Section 15: Billingham Junction - Port Clarence (POC2)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN652: Billingham Junction - Port Clarence description

Section start Phillips Siding Junction

Section end Greatham Creek

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals One Train Working One Train Working One Train Working (OTS) (OTS) (OTS)

Speed 15 mph 15 mph 15 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 0 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 2

User: 4

123

Section 16: Northallerton Castle Hills Junction – Redmire (REB4/RWS)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN624: Northallerton Castle Hills Junction – Redmire description

Section start Redmire Reversing Line

Section end Castle Hills Inner (West) Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge

Signals One Train Working One Train Working One Train Working (OTS) (OTS) (OTS)

Speed 15 mph 15 mph 15 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per throughout the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 2

124

Section 17: Seal Sands Branch (North Tees) (SES)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN652: Seal Sands Branch (North Tees) description

Section start Seal Sands Branch Junction

Section end Seal Sands Run-Round Loop

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge

Signals One Train Working One Train Working One Train Working (OTS) (OTS) (OTS)

Speed 10 mph 10 mph 10 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 0 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 6

User: 7

125

Section 18: Seaton Snook Junction - Seaton-on-Tees (SOT)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN656: Seaton Snook Junction - Seaton-on-Tees description

Section start Seaton Snook Junction

Section end Seaton-on-Tees

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals One Train Working One Train Working One Train Working (OTNS) (OTNS) (OTNS)

Speed 25 mph 25 mph 25 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per throughout the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 1

User: 0

126

Section 19: Saltburn West Junction - Cleveland Potash (SSK)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN642: Saltburn West Junction - Cleveland Potash description

Section start Saltburn West Junction

Section end Cleveland Potash

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge

Signals Mainly Token Block Mainly Token Block Mainly Token Block (TB) with some No (TB) with some No (TB) with some No Signaller Token (NST) Signaller Token (NST) Signaller Token (NST)

Speed 20 mph 20 mph 20 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 18 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 13

127

Section 20: Tees Yard (TSY)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN632: Tees Yard description

Section start Thornaby East Junction

Section end Newport East Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block (TCB) (TCB) (TCB)

Speed 20 mph 20 mph 20 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day*) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 4 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday over the busiest part of the route

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

128

Section 21: Wilton ICI Branch (WCI)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN638: Wilton ICI Branch description

Section start Shell Junction (Grangetown)

Section end Huntsman Chemicals Boundary

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block (TCB) (TCB) (TCB)

Speed 20 mph 20 mph 20 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per throughout the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

129

Section 22: Dawdon Junction – Seabanks (SEA)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route Dawdon Junction – Seabanks description

Section start Seabanks (Seaham Harbour)

Section end Dawdon Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge

Signals

Speed 15 mph 15 mph 15 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per throughout the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

130 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status description entation date

North Tees Full renewal of POC2 2012 Full renewal of AOCL In development AOCL AOCL level level crossing Renewal crossing

Crag Hall Refurbishment SSK1 2014 Refurbishment of signal In development Signal Box of signal box box Refurbishment

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation date

Belasis Installation of POC1/2, 2018 Signalling upgrade In development Lane modular signalling SES Modular Signalling

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

131 SRS G.99 - Other Freight Lines

Route specification description

This SRS consists of several unrelated freight routes, with a total length of about 17 route miles. The map and tables below provide greater detail, but the SRS can be summarised by stating that it facilitates the following connections:

 The East Coast Main Line (ECML) at Connington to Connington Tip

 The ECML south of Peterborough to the Nene Valley Railway

 The ECML south of Doncaster to Rossington Colliery

 The ECML at Newcastle to Forth Banks Engineers Sidings

 The ECML south of Newcastle to DB Schenker’s goods yard near Birtley

132

Section 1: Connington Tip Siding (CTP)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN101: Connington Tip Siding description

Section start Woodwalton Junction

Section end Conington Sidings

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W9 W9 W9

Signals Track Circuit Block ERTMS ERTMS (TCB)

Speed Up to 60 mph Up to 60 mph Up to 60 mph

Electrification Some 25kV AC OHL Some 25kV AC OHL Some 25kV AC OHL

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per throughout the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

133

Section 2: Fletton Junction - Orton Mere (FOM)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN130: Fletton Junction - Orton Mere description

Section start Fletton Junction

Section end Orton Mere

Route availability (RA)

Gauge

Signals One Train Working One Train Working One Train Working (OTS) (OTS) (OTS)

Speed 10 mph 10 mph 10 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per throughout the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

134 Section 3: Flyover West Junction - Rossington Colliery (FWR2)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN235: Flyover West Junction - Rossington Colliery description

Section start Flyover West Junction

Section end Rossington Colliery

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge

Signals One Train Working One Train Working One Train Working (OTNS) (OTNS) (OTNS)

Speed 10 mph 10 mph 10 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per throughout the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

135 Section 4: Grantham Sidings (GMS)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN101: Grantham Sidings description

Section start Grantham South Junction

Section end Grantham Station

Route availability 9 9 9 (RA)

Gauge W9 W9 W9

Signals Track Circuit Block ERTMS ERTMS (TCB)

Speed 25 mph 25 mph 25 mph

Electrification Some 25kV AC OHL Some 25kV AC OHL Some 25kV AC OHL

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per throughout the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

136

Section 5: Newcastle West Junction – Newburn (NEN)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN622: Newcastle West Junction – Newburn description

Section start Newcastle West Junction

Section end Elswick

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge

Speed 15 mph 15 mph 15 mph

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per throughout the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

137

Section 6: Tyne Yard (TEY)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN600: Tyne Yard description

Section start Birtley Junction

Section end Low Fell Junction

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W9 W9 W9

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block ERTMS (TCB) (TCB)

Speed 40 mph 40 mph 40 mph

Electrification Some 25kV AC OHL Some 25kV AC OHL Some 25kV AC OHL

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Fluctuates As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the trains per throughout the year the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight day* Network plan Network plan

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years Notes of level crossings level crossings number of level crossing type crossings

As determined by Level As determined There are no level Supervised: 0 Crossing policy by Level crossings on this ELR Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

138

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

No schemes are currently planned for Control Period 4.

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

No schemes are currently planned for Control Period 5.

139 SRS H.01 Leeds – Holbeck Junction

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this primary urban route leads in a westerly direction out of Leeds station in West Yorkshire, and leads to all routes serving this station except for those south of Leeds.

It is a short section of one point four miles of route with up to six tracks serving Leeds station.

Leeds is the only station on this route managed by Network Rail, with 17 platforms (both through and terminal) serving most local and regional destinations in Yorkshire as well as many others throughout the UK.

140

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route Leeds – Holbeck Junction Description

Section Start DOL2 184 miles 324 yds (Leeds), TJC3 195miles 344 yards (Leeds)

Section End DOL2 185 miles 327 yards (Leeds), TJC3 195 miles 344 yards (Leeds)

Route 8, 9 8, 9 10 Availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W9,W10,W12 W9,W10,W12

Signals Track Circuit Block all Track Circuit Block all Subject to the rollout controlled from York controlled from York programme of Integrated Electronic Integrated Electronic European Rail Traffic Control Centre. Control Centre. Management System. (ERTMS).

Speed Predominant 40 mph 40 mph linespeed 30 to 40 See Sectional miles per hour (mph). Appendix for detailed speed profile

Electrified 25kV Overhead line 25kV Overhead line All lines electrified. Routes towards Bradford Interchange and Stourton are currently electrified.

141

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Leeds – Holbeck Junction 2 Leeds – Holbeck Junction 2 minutes. Leeds – Holbeck and minutes. Junction 2 minutes. typical journey time

No. of Currently approximately 28 trains Changes in number of trains (passenger One tph Long trains per per hour use the route in each services per hour): Distance High hour direction forming the off-peak Speed Train. See hours rising to about 34 in the  one extra peak service Northern RUS for high-peak hours. between Skipton – Leeds, further details. between Ilkley – Leeds and Doncaster – Leeds per day in each direction from December 2011

 one longer train am peak Bradford Forster Square – Leeds from December 2011

 peak train lengthening between Manchester and Leeds and Huddersfield and Leeds in each direction from December 2011

 additional two trains per hour (tph) at peak times between Horsforth – Leeds in each direction from December 2013

Changes to passenger services in CP5:

 two extra inter regional services between Manchester – Leeds per hour in each direction by December 2016

 East Coast Main Line 2011to 2016 Capacity Review 1 extra off-peak long distance high speed service between London and Leeds in each direction by December 2016

 Additional one tph Bradford to Manchester

142  lengthening of inter regional services to 6 cars between Manchester to Leeds in each direction from December 2016

 Further lengthening to 4 cars of peak regional services into Leeds in the morning peak and out of Leeds in the evening peak from December 2019.

(Peak is 07:00 – 10:00 and 16:00 – 19:00. High – peak is 08:00 – 09:00 and 17:00 – 18:00).

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains Holbeck Junction – Leeds As per the Strategic Freight As per the Strategic Freight per day three in each direction Network forecasts. Network forecasts.

Whitehall Junction – Leeds five in each direction

Freight traffic is subject to timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

Level crossings on route Description Current Number of Level + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised 0 As determined by Level As determined by Crossing policy. Level Crossing policy. Automatic: 0

User: 1

143 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009-2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 Project Project ELR Implementation Output change Notes Status Description Date

Leeds Station Redevelopment HUL4 2013 – 14 Improved station In development of the station and facilities, new southern additional footfall entrance capacity for passenger growth and improved access.

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014-2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Due Output change Notes Status Description Date

Leeds Station Alterations to HUL4 2014 – To meet HLOS In development Capacity platform 19 passenger growth and Improvements: layout. improve capacity and New bay performance in Leeds platforms at Station area North West end

Extension of Alterations to HUL4 2014 – To allow additional 4 x In development Platform 17 platform layout. 19 23m cars to terminate Leeds City on southern side of Station station.

Leeds Station Alterations to HUL4 2014 – To meet High Level In development Capacity platform layout. 19 Output Specification Improvements passenger growth and : New through improve capacity and Platform 13/14 performance in Leeds Station area

Sheffield – This includes TJC3, ELM 2018/19 Journey time In development Leeds Horbury improvements Junction remodelling.

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

144 SRS H.02 Leeds – York (via Harrogate)

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this rural route leads in a north easterly direction from Leeds station in West Yorkshire via Harrogate and into York.

This route consists of a section of 36 miles of route with a double track section from Leeds to Knaresborough and a single track from Knaresborough to Cattal. It is then double track from Cattal to Hammerton for approximately one and a half miles, before returning to a single track section for nearly five miles between Hammerton and Poppleton. The track is double between Poppleton and the approaches to Skelton Junction near York.

This route carries local passenger traffic between Leeds and York via Harrogate, with the busiest section being between Horsforth and Leeds at peak times.

The route contains 12 stations, 45 level crossings and one major tunnel. The route contains several major structures: HAY1/20 Nidd Viaduct, Knaresborough, (stone construction, one span), LEH1/3 Kirkstall Viaduct (stone construction, 23 spans) and LEH1/30 Arthington Viaduct (stone construction, 21 spans).

The major stations on this route are Harrogate and Knaresborough. Harrogate has three platforms with the remaining stations having two platforms of varying lengths.

145

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route Leeds – York (via Harrogate) Description

Section Start LEH1 0m 452 yds (Armley Junction), LEH2 14m 320 yds (Pannal Junction), LEH3 15m 440 yds (Crimple Junction), HAY2 18m 1320 yds (Harrogate), HAY1 1 m 1122 yds (near Starbeck)

Section End LEH1 14m 320 yds (Pannal Junction), LEH2 15m 440 yds (Crimple Junction), LEH3 17m 528 yds (Harrogate), HAY2 20m 836 yds (near Starbeck), HAY1 18 m 1320 yds (Skelton Junction.)

Route 8 8 8 Availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals Mixture of light- Proposed Subject to the rollout emitting diode and rationalisation of programme of semaphore signals. mechanical signal European Rail Traffic Predominantly boxes between Management System. absolute block with Horsforth and (ERTMS). semaphore signals Harrogate and mechanical signal (exclusive) and boxes and single token migration of control exchange points to York Integrated between Electronic Control Knaresborough and Centre. Poppleton.

Speed Predominant 75 mph. To be advised. linespeed 60 miles See Sectional per hour (mph). Appendix for detailed speed profiles.

Electrified Not electrified. Not electrified. Not electrified.

146

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Leeds – York via Harrogate Leeds – York via Harrogate one Leeds – York via Harrogate one and one hour 15 minutes. hour 15 minutes. hour 15 minutes. typical journey time

No. of Leeds – Knaresborough two Extra two trains per hour at Reduce local stopping service trains per trains per hour with one train peak times in each direction journey time to lowest possible per hour extending to York. hour (from December 2013) in line with any line speed There are additional services at peak times with up to three between Horsforth and Leeds. improvements and changes in trains per hour. rolling stock.

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains No booked freight services. As per the Strategic Freight As per the Strategic Freight per day Network forecasts. Network forecasts.

Level crossings on route Description Current Number of Level + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 12 As determined by Level As determined by Level Crossing policy Crossing policy Automatic: 1

User: 32

147 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status Description entation Date

Harrogate Renewal LEH1 By Renewal of asset. Under construction Horsforth December signalling 2012 renewal

Harrogate Additional LEH1 2011/12 Increased capacity to Under construction Horsforth signal sections meet HLOS Signalling and provision of passenger growth a turnback and improved journey siding. times through service changes.

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 – 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Due Output change Notes Status Description Date

Potential third Horsforth LEH1 By 2019 New journey In development party funded Woodside New opportunities. new stations. Station Providing new journey opportunities and capacity improvements.

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

148 SRS H.03 Leeds – Skipton / Ilkley

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West. This urban electrified secondary route carries West Yorkshire Passenger Transport Executive sponsored passenger services and freight and leads in a north westerly direction out of Leeds to Skipton, Bradford Forster Square and Ilkley forming what is known locally as the ‘Leeds Triangle’.

It forms a group of lines totalling approximately 50 miles of route outside the vicinity of Leeds. The majority of track is double with the exception of the Baildon Branch and the south curve at Shipley which are single. There is an up and down passing loop situated at Kirkstall.

A freight only route from Rylstone joins this route at Skipton (see Route Specification H.98 for further details).

The route centres on Leeds station. This station with 17 platforms (both through and terminal) is managed by Network Rail. This station serves both local and regional destinations in Yorkshire as well as destinations UK wide.

The route to Skipton contains eight stations (including Shipley) with the route to Ilkley containing five stations and the route to Bradford Forster Square contains three stations (including Shipley). The route between Guiseley and Shipley has one station. The main stations are Shipley, Keighley, Skipton, Bradford Forster Square and Ilkley. Most stations have two platforms although Skipton has four, Shipley five, Bradford Forster Square three and Balidon has a single platform. Two new stations are being developed on the route.

149 There are 21 level crossings and one tunnel on the route to Skipton. The route to Ilkley and the single track route between Shipley and Guiseley contain three small tunnels each.

The route between Shipley and Guiseley contains a major structure, GUE2/12 Tong Park Viaduct consisting of 10 brick spans.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route Leeds – Skipton / Ilkley Description

Section Start BIB 0m 0 yds (Shipley), GUE2 0m 0 yds (Esholt Junction), ILK1 202m 66 yds (Apperley Junction), ILK2 208m 0 yds (Burley – in – Wharfedale), SBF 205m 1213 yds (Shipley), TJC3 195m 1203 yds (Armley Junction, Leeds)

Section End BIB 0m 374 yds (Shipley), GUE2 3m 894 yds (Shipley), ILK1 208m 0yds (Burley – in – Wharfedale), ILK2 211m 435 yds (Ilkley), SBF 208m 1085 yds (Bradford Forster Square), TJC3 221m 1496 yds (Skipton)

Route 5 Baildon Branch 5 5 Availability (RA) 7, 8 for remainder 7, 8 7, 8

Gauge W6, W7 W7 W7

Signals Track circuit block. Track circuit block. Subject to the rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed Predominant linespeed 90 90 miles per hour. To be advised. miles per hour. See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles.

Electrified 25kV Overhead line 25kV Overhead line 25kV Overhead line

150

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Leeds to Skipton: 43 minutes. Leeds to Skipton: 43 minutes. Reduce local stopping and service journey time to typical Leeds to Ilkley: 28 minutes. Leeds to Ilkley: 28 minutes. lowest possible in line journey with linespeed time Leeds to Bradford Forster Square: Leeds to Bradford Forster improvements and 40 minutes. Square: 40 minutes. changes in rolling stock.

No. of Leeds to Ilkley, Leeds to Skipton, Changes in the number of trains Train lengthening up to trains per Leeds to Bradford Forster per hour in passenger service: six cars on the Skipton hour Square, Ilkley to Bradford to Ilkley route by services operate on a half hourly  one extra peak service December 2024. basis. They are supplemented by between Skipton to a diesel service operating at Leeds, between Ilkley slightly more than two hour to Leeds and frequencies beyond Skipton to Doncaster to Leeds per either Carlisle or day in each direction Morecambe/Lancaster. from December 2011

 one longer train am peak Bradford Forster Square to Leeds from December 2011

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains Three trains per day in As per the Strategic Freight As per the Strategic per day each direction (weekday) Network forecasts. Freight Network forecasts.

*Freight traffic is subject to timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

Level crossings on route Description Current Number of Level + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 2 As determined by Level As determined by Level Crossing policy. Crossing policy. Automatic: 0

User: 19

151 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project Description Engineeri Implem- Output change Notes Status ng Line of entation Reference Date

Skipton Additional stabling. TJC3 2011/12 Increased capacity In development additional through fleet stabling for enlargement. Northern Rail.

Shipley Line Removal of Permanent BIB 2011/12 Improves In development Speed Speed Restrictions. performance. Improvement scheme.

Platform For six car trains. TJC3, ILK1 2014 – 19 Increased capacity. In development Extensions on and ILK2 the Ilkley and Skipton routes.

Leeds Station Redevelopment of the HUL4 2013 – 14 Improved station In development station and new southern facilities, additional entrance footfall capacity for passenger growth and improved access.

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project Engineering Due Output Notes Status Description Line of Date change Reference

Leeds Station Alterations to HUL4 2014 – To meet In development Capacity platform layout. 19 HLOS Improvements: passenger New bay growth and platforms at improve North West end capacity and performance in Leeds Station area

152 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project Engineering Due Output Notes Status Description Line of Date change Reference

Extension of Alterations to HUL4 2014 – To allow In development Platform 17 platform layout. 19 additional 4 x Leeds City 23m cars to Station terminate on southern side of station.

Leeds Station Alterations to HUL4 2014 – To meet In development Capacity platform layout. 19 High Level Improvements : Output New through Specification Platform 13/14 passenger growth and improve capacity and performance in Leeds Station area

New stations at Potential new TJC3 2014 – Increased In development Kirkstall Forge stations at Kirkstall 19 capacity and and Apperley Forge and Apperley new journey Bridge Bridge opportunities.

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

153 SRS H.04 Leeds – Halifax (via Bradford)

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this rural route leads in a west and south westerly direction out of Leeds station in West Yorkshire, to Bramley, New Pudsey, Bradford Interchange and Halifax and onto Greetland Junction and Milner Royd Junction on the Calder Valley Line.

A multi section of approximately 20 miles of route all double track.

This route carries West Yorkshire Passenger Transport Executive sponsored passenger services between Leeds and Bradford/Halifax. The route also sees passenger trains to Manchester via Rochdale and from York to Blackpool.

The route contains four stations with Bradford Interchange and Halifax being the two most significant. Both are on the Caldervale Line. Bradford Interchange is a terminus station managed by Northern Rail and Metro. All the stations have two platforms except Bradford Interchange with four platforms and Halifax with a single island platform. The route contains three level crossings and eight tunnels.

The route contains several major structures, namely:

 Copley Viaduct (MRB2), stone construction (23 spans)  Beacon Hill Viaduct (MRB21), stone construction (10 spans)  Bottom Hall Viaduct (MRB36), stone construction (11 spans).

154

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route Leeds – Halifax (via Bradford) Description

Section Start LBE1 0m 44ch (Leeds), LBE2 190m 671 yds (Laisterdyke E. Junction.), LBE3 190m 1100 yds (Laisterdyke W. Junction.), LBE4 191 660 yds (Hammerton St. Junction.), MRB 29m 462 yds Mill Lane Junction), GRD 0m 0 yds (Dryclough Junction)

Section End LBE1 6m 1210 yds (Laisterdyke E. Junction.), LBE2 190m 1100 yds (Laisterdyke W. Junction.), LBE3 191m 660 yds (Hammerton St. Junction.), LBE4 191m 1716 yds (Mill Lane Junction.), MRB 40m 593 yds (Milner Royd Junction.), GRD 1m 242 yds (Greatland Junction.)

Route 8 8 8 Availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals Track circuit block. Track circuit block. Subject to the rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System. (ERTMS).

Speed Predominant 75 miles per hour 75 miles per hour See Northern Hub. linespeed 60 miles See Sectional per hour. Appendix for detailed speed profiles.

Electrified Not electrified. Not electrified. Not electrified.

155

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Leeds to Halifax via Bradford Leeds to Halifax via Bradford and Interchange, 35 minutes. Interchange, 35 minutes typical journey time

No. of On the Leeds Bradford there are four Changes in number of trains per trains per trains per hour including a Blackpool hour in passenger services: hour to York train and a half hourly service from Leeds to Manchester via  one longer train am peak Rochdale in each direction. Bradford Forster Square – Leeds from December 2011

 Additional one train per hour Bradford Manchester in each direction by 2019.

(Peak is 07.00 – 10.00 and 16:00 – 19.00. High-peak is 08:00 – 09:00 and 17:00 – 18:00).

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains An occasional service As per the Strategic Freight As per the Strategic Freight per day between Laisterdyke and Network forecasts. Network forecasts. Healey Mills.

Level crossings on route Description Current Number of Level + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 0 As determined by the Level As determined by the Level Crossing policy Crossing policy Automatic 0

User 3

156 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implementation Output Notes Status Description Date change

Low Moor Potential new MRB 2012 New journey In development potential new station opportunities. station.

Halifax New MRB 2019/20 Improved In development Remodelling turnback capacity and facing performance. East/West Bradford Complex LBE3/ 2019/20 Improved In development Remodelling remodelling MRB capacity and of the performance. station area Northern Hub Various GRD 2019 New journey In development through services LBE1 opportunities to Manchester LBE2 Airport. LBE3 LBE4 MRB

Leeds Station Redevelopm HUL4 2013 – 14 Improved In development ent of the station station and facilities, new southern additional entrance footfall capacity for passenger growth and improved access.

157

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Due Output change Notes Status Description Date

Leeds Station Alterations HUL4 2014 – To meet HLOS In development Capacity to platform 19 passenger growth and Improvements: layout. improve capacity and New bay performance in Leeds platforms at Station area North West end

Extension of Alterations to HUL4 2014 – To allow additional 4 x In development Platform 17 platform 19 23m cars to terminate on Leeds City layout. southern side of station. Station

Leeds Station Alterations to HUL4 2014 – To meet High Level In development Capacity platform 19 Output Specification Improvements : layout. passenger growth and New through improve capacity and Platform 13/14 performance in Leeds Station area

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

158 SRS H.05 North Transpennine: Leeds – Guide Bridge

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this secondary route leads in a south westerly direction out of Leeds City station in West Yorkshire, towards Huddersfield, Stalybridge and onto Guide Bridge (traffic is via Manchester Piccadilly). This interurban corridor carries regional, inter regional, and freight services between Yorkshire and the North West of England.

It is double track 36 mile route covering both London North Eastern (LNE) and London North Western (LNW), with the boundary being to the west of Standedge Tunnel.

The route between Leeds (exclusive) and Thornhill Junction LNW contains five stations, whilst the section of route from Heaton Lodge Junction to Stalybridge exclusive contains six stations. Huddersfield station is the major station on this section of route and is managed by First TransPennine Express. The station has eight platforms (two bays) with fast services to Manchester, Liverpool, Leeds, Hull and to the North East. This station also serves stopping services to/from Leeds and Wakefield Westgate and Sheffield to Penistone.

The route between Manchester and Stalybridge inclusive includes three stations of which Manchester Victoria and Stalybridge are the most significant. Manchester Victoria station contains six platforms serving Greater Manchester, the north west of England, Merseyside and Yorkshire. Stalybridge is served by three platforms and is situated where the route divides towards Manchester Piccadilly and Manchester Victoria.

Travelling east to west from Leeds sees the route climbing steadily between Morley and between Morley and Dewsbury and between Huddersfield and Standedge Tunnel before dropping down into

159 Stalybridge. There are passenger loops at Dewsbury (Down), Huddersfield, Marsden and Diggle and Stalybridge. The section between Thornhill Junction and Heaton Lodge Junction is three track.

The route contains five level crossings and two major tunnels.

This route excludes the section of route between Mirfield East Junction and Thornhill London North West Junction. This is included in Route Specification H.09.

The route contains several major structures, namely:  Dewsbury Viaduct (MDL1/9), stone viaduct, 11 arches  Batley Viaduct (MDL1/27), stone viaduct, 16 arches  Slaithwaite Viaduct (MVL3/61), stone and brick construction, 14 spans  Crimble Viaduct (MVL3/64), stone and brick construction, 19 spans  Milne Viaduct (Longwood) (MVL3/76), stone and brick construction, 20 spans  Huddersfield Viaduct (MVL3/92), wrought iron and stone construction, 47 spans  One grade separated junction at Heaton Lodge Junction.

There is also a Strategic Freight Site at Hillhouse on this route.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route North Trans Pennine: Leeds – Guide Bridge Description

Section Start MDL1: 32m 342 yds (Thornhill LNW Junction), MVL4: 28m 1716 yds (Bradley Junction.), MVL3: 7m 1630 yds (Stalybridge), MVN2: 37m 779 yds (Heaton Lodge Junction.), SAJ: 0m 85 yds (Ardwick)

Section End MDL1: 42m 58 yds (Leeds), MVL4: 29m 1628 yds (Heaton Lodge Junction.), MVL3: 29m 957 yds (Bradley Junction.), MVN2: 39m 703 yds (Mirfield East Junction), SAJ: 2m 177 yds (Stalybridge)

Route 8, 9 9 9 Availability (RA)

Gauge W6, W7, W8, W9 W10, W12 W10, W12

Signals Track circuit block. Track circuit block. Subject to the rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System. (ERTMS).

Speed Predominant Raise linespeed to To be advised. Being developed under linespeed 80 miles highest possible in line journey time improvement See Sectional per hour. with infrastructure scheme and schemes being Appendix for characteristics and developed within the detailed speed capability of rolling Northern Hub. profiles. stock.

Electrified Not electrified. 25kV AC 25kV AC electrification. See Network RUS: electrification. Electrification strategy.

160

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Leeds – Huddersfield fast 20 minutes Reduce journey time to lowest To be advised. and and slow 40 minutes possible in line with linespeed typical improvements and changes in rolling journey Leeds – Manchester fast 54 minutes stock, for local electric stopping time and slow 1 hr 23 minutes service.

Leeds – Guide Bridge 1 hour 20 minutes

No. of Currently on the Leeds – Guide Changes in number of trains in To be advised. trains per Bridge route via Manchester passenger services per hour hour Piccadilly there are mainly 4 trains per hour in each direction for most  peak train lengthening of the day. This corridor also carries between Manchester – a number of local services operated Leeds, Huddersfield – by Northern Rail including 1 train Leeds in each direction per hour from Huddersfield to east from December 2011 of Leeds and Manchester in each direction. Additional services  Additional shuttle services operate during the peak times. between Manchester – Stalybridge 1 train per hour in each direction from An hourly local service in each December 2013 (see Route direction between Wakefield Specification H.10). Westgate and Huddersfield travels part of this route between Control Period 5: Huddersfield and Mirfield East  2 extra inter regional Junction. A further 3 trains per day services in each direction between Manchester – between Bradford and London Leeds by December 2016 cross this route between Heaton  lengthening of inter regional Lodge Junction and Mirfield East services to 6 cars between Junction and Thornhill LNW Manchester – Leeds in Junction (see Route Specification each direction from H.09). December 2016  Further lengthening to 4 cars of peak regional services between Manchester – Leeds in each direction from 2019.

161

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains 6 tpd in each direction Heaton Lodge As per the Strategic As per the per day Junction to Thornhill LNW Junction, 2 tpd Freight Network Strategic Freight Diggle Junction to Heaton Lodge forecasts. Network forecasts. Junction in each direction.

Freight traffic is subject to Timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

Level crossings on route Description Current Number of Level + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 0 As determined by the Level As determined by the Level Crossing policy Crossing policy Automatic: 1

User: 4

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 Project Project ELR Implementation Output Notes Status Description Date change

North Cross Manchester to MDL1, 2013/14 Journey time In development Pennine Route Leeds via MVL4, and capacity Upgrade Phase Diggle journey MVN2, SAJ improvements One time improvements

Stalybridge Renewal and MVL2 2012/13 Provides This will In development Resignalling provision of a improved allow the and Capacity new turnback operational HLOS Improvements. platform at flexibility that targets to Stalybridge allows more be met efficient use without the of rolling need to stock. excessively lengthen platforms.

162 Leeds Station Redevelopment HUL4 2013 – 14 Improved In development of the station station and new facilities, southern additional entrance footfall capacity for passenger growth and improved access.

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project Description ELR Due Output change Notes Status Date

Huddersfield – Leeds Platform Extensions MDL1 2019 Increased capacity. In development and and between MVL3 under construction Huddersfield – Manchester

Northern Hub. Journey time and MDL1 2014 Journey In development capacity MVL3 – 19 time/capacity improvements MVL4 improvements between SAJ Manchester Leeds via Diggle

Huddersfield Station Platform alterations. MVL3 2014 Platform alterations In development Capacity – 19 to cater for longer Improvements. trains to meet Higher Level Output Specification metrics.

Additional stabling Stabling for MVL3 2014 Increased capacity. In development for Northern Rail improved Northern – 19 (West Yorkshire) Rail fleet (Hillhouse)

Leeds Station Alterations to HUL4 2014 To meet HLOS In development Capacity platform layout. – 19 passenger growth Improvements: New and improve bay platforms at capacity and North West end performance in Leeds Station area

163 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project Description ELR Due Output change Notes Status Date

Extension of Platform Alterations to HUL4 2014 To allow additional 4 In development 17 Leeds City Station platform layout. – 19 x 23m cars to terminate on southern side of station.

Leeds Station Alterations to HUL4 2014 To meet High Level In development Capacity platform layout. – 19 Output Specification Improvements : New passenger growth through Platform and improve 13/14 capacity and performance in Leeds Station area

Electrification Provision of 25kV SAJ, 2014 Ability to operate In development between Manchester Overhead line MVL4, Electric Multiple and Leeds MVL3, Units and journey MDL1 time benefits for local electric stopping services.

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

164 SRS H.06 Leeds – Colton Junction

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this secondary interurban route leads in an easterly direction out of Leeds station in West Yorkshire, to Garforth, Micklefield and then north to Church Fenton, Ulleskelf and Colton Junction just south of the City of York.

It is multi route section of approximately 20 miles of mainly double track route with the exception of Church Fenton to Colton Junction which is four track.

Leeds is the main station on this route, managed by Network Rail, with 17 platforms (both through and terminal) serving both the local and regional destinations in Yorkshire as well as destinations UK wide. The remaining stations on the route are smaller two platform stations apart from Ulleskelf which is an island platform with two faces.

Excluding Leeds this route contains six stations and nine level crossings.

There is a train care depot located at Neville Hill. This facility is jointly operated by East Midlands Trains (EMT) and Northern Rail (Northern) and undertakes light and heavy maintenance and stabling and is also used by CrossCountry, East Coast Trains and Grand Central.

165

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route Leeds – Colton Junction. Description

Section Start HUL4 20m 1100 yds (Leeds), CFM 15m 342 yds (Micklefield), NOC 10m 694 yds (Church Fenton)

Section End HUL4 10m 1100 yds (Micklefield), CFM 10m 682 yds (Church Fenton), NOC 5m 902 yds (Colton Junction)

Route 8, 9 9 9 Availability (RA)

Gauge W8, W9 W10, W12 W10, W12

Signals Track Circuit Block. Track Circuit Block. Subject to the rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed Predominant 100 miles per hour. 100 miles per hour. linespeed 90 miles See Sectional per hour. Appendix for detailed speed profile.

Electrified Not electrified. 25kv AC electrification. 25kv AC See Network RUS: electrification. Electrification Strategy

166

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Average Leeds Micklefield local stopper 18 minutes, interregional service (passing train) 10 minutes end to end Micklefield Colton local stopper 15 minutes, interregional service (passing train) 12 minutes Journey time

No. of Currently on the Leeds to Train lengthening up to four cars 1 tph Long Distance trains per Micklefield route there are 7 for Local and Regional services High Speed Train. hour passenger tph. Between with up to six cars for inter regional See Northern RUS for Micklefield and Church Fenton services operating between Leeds further details. there are 5 passenger tph, between – York. Church Fenton and Colton Junction there are 5 tph supplemented by an 3 additional tph Leeds to extra service every two hours. Micklefield in each direction.

2 additional tph Leeds to Micklefield in 1 additional tph Leeds to Colton each direction. Junction in each direction.

1 additional tph Leeds to Colton Junction in each direction.

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains 4 trains per day (weekday As per the Strategic Freight As per the Strategic Freight per day Leeds – Church Fenton). Network forecasts. Network forecasts.

42 tpd in each direction Church Fenton – Colton Junction).

Freight traffic is subject to timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

Level crossings on route Description Current Number of + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 0 As determined by the As determined by the . Level Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic 0

User 9

167 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 Project Project ELR Implementation Output Notes Status Description Date Change

Leeds Redevelopment HUL4 2013/14 Improved In development Station of the station station and new facilities, southern additional entrance footfall capacity for passenger growth and improved access.

Neville Hill S&C Renewal HUL4 By 2013 Asset In development renewal.

Additional Stabling for HUL4 By December Increased In construction stabling at increased 2011 capacity Neville Hill. Northern Rail through fleet fleet enlargement.

Micklefield S&C Renewals HUL3 2013/14 Asset In development Junction renewal.

168

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 – 2019) Project Project ELR Due Output Change Notes Status Description Date

Leeds Station Alterations to HUL4 2014 – To meet HLOS In development Capacity platform 19 passenger growth Improvements: layout. and improve New bay platforms capacity and at North West end performance in Leeds Station area

Extension of Alterations to HUL4 2014 – To allow additional 4 In development Platform 17 Leeds platform 19 x 23m cars to City Station layout. terminate on southern side of station.

Leeds Station Alterations to HUL4 2014 – To meet High Level In development Capacity platform layout. 19 Output Specification Improvements : New passenger growth and through Platform improve capacity and 13/14 performance in Leeds Station area

Platform extensions Platform HUL4 2019 To In development between Leeds extensions CFM accommodat York. NOC e longer trains.

Neville Hill Layout Layout HUL4 2014 – Improved performance In development Improvements alterations to 16 give better depot access/egress

Freight Gauge Provision of NOC 2014 – Improved gauge In development Enhancements: W10/W11/W12 19 clearance. Altolfts Junction to Colton Junction

Electrification Leeds Provision of HUL4 2014 – Ability to operate In development York 25kV CFM 19 Electric Multiple Units Overhead line NOC and gives access benefits and journey time improvements for electric services.

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

169 SRS H.07 Hull – Micklefield

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this secondary interurban route leads in a westerly direction out of Hull, through Ferriby, Gilberdyke and Selby towards Leeds. This Route Specification also includes Templehirst Junction to Selby South Junction, Hambleton North and South Curve, the Goods Line between Selby West Junction and Selby Canal Junction, and the route between Gascoigne Wood Junction and Sherburn Junction. The freight only Hull Docks branch line diverges from the Micklefield to Hull routes at Hessle Road Junction.

This is a multi route section of approximately 96 miles of mainly double track route with the exception of Selby West Junction to Selby Canal Junction (single track Goods Line), Hambleton East Junction to Hambleton North Junction. Sherburn Junction to Gascoigne Wood is double track but with a single track lead approaching Gascoigne Wood Junction. The route contains eleven railway stations with Hull and Selby being the two most significant on this route. Hull station is managed by First TransPennine Express (TPE) and has seven platforms, with East Coast and First Hull Trains offering a service to London, TPE to Leeds, Manchester and Liverpool and Northern Rail to Bridlington/Scarborough, Doncaster, Sheffield, York and local destinations. Selby station is also managed by TPE and has three platforms

The Potter Group operate a freight terminal at Selby and is accessed by a connection just prior to Barlby North Junction, and sees daily rail services bringing freight from across the UK and mainland Europe to Selby for storage or distribution by road. There is also a Train Maintenance Depot at Hull Botanic Gardens located approximately a mile north east of Hull station for stabling, servicing and heavy maintenance of the Northern Rail, TPE and Hull Trains vehicle fleets.

170

The route contains 87 level crossings and a major structure, namely Selby Swing Bridge at HUL2/25, a wrought iron bridge consisting of five spans.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route Hull – Micklefield Description

Section Start HBS 0m 550 yds (Hull), HNC 3m 748 yds (Hambleton), HSC 174m 220 yds (Hambleton), HUL1 0m 0 yds (Hull), HUL2 30m 880 yds (Selby), HUL3 0. 0 yds (Selby), SEC 0 m 0 yds (Selby), SHG 13m 418 yds (Sherburn Junction), TCW1 169m 352 yds (Templehirst Junction)

Section End HBS 0m 1290 yds (Hull), HNC 4m 00 yds (Hambleton), HSC 175m 726 yds (Hambleton), HUL1 30m 880 yds (Barlby), HUL2 31m 264 yds (Selby), HUL3 10m 1100 yds (Selby), SEC 0m 726 yds (Selby), SHG 14m 748 yds (Gascoigne Wood Junction), TCW1 174m 242 yds (Selby)

Route 8, 9, 10 8 Micklefield – Gascoigne 8 Micklefield – Gascoigne Availability Wood (6 miles 27chains), 10 Wood (6 miles 27chains), 10 (RA) for remainder of route, for remainder of route, remove Heavy Axle Weight remove Heavy Axle Weight restrictions. restrictions.

Gauge W6, W8, W9 W9, W10, W12 W9, W10, W12

Signals Mixture of Track Circuit Mixture of Track Circuit Subject to the rollout Block and Absolute Block. Block and Absolute Block. programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed Predominant linespeed 100 mph 100 mph 90 miles per hour (mph) See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles.

Electrified Not electrified. 25kV Electrification. 25kV Electrification. Electrification of this route is an option in the Electrification Programme.

171

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Hull – Selby local stopper Hull – Selby local stopper Reduce local stopping and 40 minutes, interregional 30 40 minutes, interregional 30 service journey time to typical minutes. minutes. lowest possible in line with journey linespeed improvements time Selby – Micklefield local Selby – Micklefield local and changes in rolling stopper 17 minutes, stopper 17 minutes, stock, potential for local interregional (passing train) interregional (passing train) electric service. 13 minutes. 13 minutes.

Selby – Templehirst Selby – Templehirst Junction interregional Junction interregional (passing train) 9 minutes. (passing train) 9 minutes.

No. of Hull – Gilberdyke Junction One train extra To be advised. trains per three trains per hour (tph) in (interregional train) per hour each direction plus eight hour to Selby or/and Hull trains per day (tpd) in each in each direction by direction. December 2016.

Gilberdyke Junction – Selby 1 tph to London via two tph in each direction Hambleton in each direction. Selby – Micklefield two tph off-peak in each direction, four tph peak in each direction.

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains Hambleton South Junction As per the Strategic Freight As per the Strategic Freight per day – Hambleton West Network forecasts. Network forecasts. Junction: 29 tpd in each direction (weekday), mainly services to Drax, Eggborough and Ferrybridge Power Stations.

Freight traffic is subject to timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

172

Level crossings on route Description Current Number of Level + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 19 As determined by Level As determined by Level Crossing Policy Crossing Policy Automatic: 8

User: 60

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 Project Project ELR Implementation Output Notes Status Description Date change

Additional HUL1 2011 Increased In construction Hull Botanical stabling for capacity Gardens Northern Rail. through fleet Depot capacity.

Hull to Journey Time HUL1, 2014 Journey Time In development Micklefield Improvements HUL3 and Improvements Journey Time TCW1 improvement.

Micklefield S&C HUL3 2013/14 Asset renewal In development Junction Renewals

173

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Due Output change Notes Status Description Date

Micklefield New station with HUL3 2014 – Increased capacity, In development Station single turnback 2019 some new journey Relocated facility. opportunities.

Platform To accommodate HUL3 2014 – Platform extensions at In development extensions longer trains. 2019 South Milford (Down and Up)

Ferriby – Signalling renewal HUL1 2014 – Capacity/performance In development Gilberdyke with opportunities 2019 and journey time to improve improvements. headways

Ferriby – Journey HUL1 2014 – Improved journey In development Gilberdyke Time/Capacity 2019 times. Improvements

W10 Gauge Freight gauge HUL1 2014 – Capability to carry In development Clearance clearance HUL2 2019 deep sea containers Felixstowe to improvement. HUL3 on standard deck Yorkshire height wagons to Selby Terminals. (Potter Group), Wakefield Europort and Stourton.

Electrification Provision of 25kV HUL1 2014 – Ability to operate In development Micklefield to Overhead line HUL2 2019 electric multiple unit Hull via Selby HUL3 plus journey time HUL4 improvements.

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

174 SRS H.08 Gilberdyke – Hatfield and Stainforth/Knottingley and Church Fenton – Moorthorpe

Route specification description

This route is part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West. This secondary route consists of a two track section between Gilberdyke and Goole and Goole and Thorne North Junction, with the actual junction at Thorne North comprising a single lead. The route between Goole and Knottingley is double track with an eight mile single track section between Potters Grange Junction (near Goole) to approximately two miles east of Hensall.

A further section of route links Church Fenton in the north with Moorthorpe in the south. This is a double track railway. The route is also double track between Calder Bridge Junction (near Wakefield Kirkgate) and Normanton.

These routes carry a mixture of local passenger and freight traffic although the route between Goole and Knottingley is predominantly a freight route seeing numerous freight services to the Aire Valley Power Stations at Drax and Eggborough (see Route Specification H.98). The link between Calder Bridge Junction and Turners Lane Junction (near Normanton) is a freight only route carrying freight traffic for Wakefield Europort and the Aire Valley Power Stations. There are nine stations within this route specification area of which the two most significant are Goole and Knottingley. There are 80 level crossings on this route which also contains a major structure, namely Goole Swing Bridge at TJG2/5, a wrought iron bridge of six spans.

175

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route Gilberdyke – Hatfield and Stainforth / Knottingley and Church Fenton – Moorthorpe Description

Section Start CTL 0m 0yds (Calder Bridge Junction.), MVN2 48m 726 yds (Turners Lane Junction.), NOC 15m 220 yds (Milford Junction.), SMJ2 11m 528yds (Moorthorpe), SMJ3 16m 1518 yds (Burton Salmon), TJG1 7m 1520 yds (Thorne Junction.), TJG2 14m 0ch (Thorne N), WAG1 57m 1184 yds (Knottingley) WAG2 0m yds (Engine Shed Junction.)

Section End CTL 0m 1166yds (Turners Lane Junction.), MVN2 50m 682 yds (Goose Hill Junction.) NOC 10m 1694 yds (Church Fenton), SMJ2 0m 0yds (Burton Salmon), SMJ3 15m 88 yds (Milford Junction.), TJG1 9m 704 yds (Thorne North.), TJG2 0m 0ch (Gilberdyke Junction.), WAG1 73m 1144 yds (Engine Shed Junction.), WAG2 0m 1408 yds (Mineral Junction.)

Route 8, 9 9 9 Availability (RA)

Gauge W6, W8, W9 W9 W9

Signals Track circuit block. Track circuit block. Subject to the rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed Predominant 75 mph 75 mph linespeed 70 miles See Sectional per hour (mph). Appendix for detailed speed profiles.

Electrified Not electrified. Not electrified. Not electrified.

176

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Gilberdyke – Thorne North, local (passing time) 20 minutes approximately. and typical Church Fenton – Moorthorpe, 35 minutes. journey time

No. of Gilberdyke – Thorne two trains per hour (tph) in each No change. To be advised. trains per direction. hour Goole – Knottingley two trains per day (tpd) in each direction.

Moorthorpe – Ferrybridge two tpd in each direction.

Ferrybridge – Milford Junction two tpd in each direction.

Milford Junction – Sherburn South Junction two tpd in each direction.

Calder Bridge – Turners Lane Junction nil

(Turners Lane – Normanton three tph in each direction between Sheffield and Leeds.)

Knottingley – Pontefract East Junction one tph in each direction plus 3 Bradford to London trains per day in each direction.

177 Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains Gilberdyke – Knottingley West As per the Strategic Freight As per the Strategic per day Junction two trains per day Network forecasts. Freight Network (weekday). forecasts.

Moorthorpe – Ferrybridge three tpd in each direction.

Ferrybridge – Milford Junction 30 tpd in each direction.

Calder Bridge – Turners Lane Junction 18 tpd in each direction.

Turners Lane Junction – Normanton three tpd in each direction.

Thorne Junction – Hatfield and Stainforth 32 tpd in each direction.

Hare Park – Crofton one tpd in each direction.

Church Fenton – Moorthorpe four tpd in each direction.

Knottingley West Junction and Knottingley East Junction 46 tpd in each direction.

Church Fenton Milford Junction 42 tpd in each direction.

Milford Junction Moorthorpe 8 tpd in each direction.

Knottingley Drax Branch Junction 35 tpd in each direction.

Mirfield Thornhill 7 tpd in each direction.

Freight traffic is subject to timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

178 Level crossings on route Description Current Number of + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 13 As determined by the As determined by the Level Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic: 7

User: 60

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 Project Project ELR Implementation Output change Notes Status Description Date

Whitley Signal interlocking WAG1 2012 – 14 Renewed asset. In development Bridge, renewal Sudforth Lane and Hensall

North Provision of flyover KWS, CJS By 2014 Provide In development Doncaster connecting Askern additional route Chord and Applehurst for freight as an (Shaftholme Junction lines. alternative to the Junction East Coast Main Remodelling). Line.

Knottingley S&C Renewal WAG1 2011/12 Renewed asset. Under construction West S&C

179

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Due Output change Notes Status Description Date

Sheffield – Leeds Journey time MVN2 2018/19 Journey time In development improvements improvements including Horbury Junction remodelling.

Freight Gauge Provision of SMJ3, 2014 – Gauge enhancements In development Enhancements: W10/W11/W12 MGW 19 Altofts Junction to Colton Junction

W10 Gauge Freight gauge MVN2 2014 – Capability to carry deep In development Clearance clearance WAG1 2019 sea containers on Felixstowe to improvement. TJC3 standard deck height Yorkshire wagons to Selby (Potter Terminals. Group), Wakefield Europort and Stourton.

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

180 SRS H.09 Knottingley – Mirfield via Crofton Junction/Castleford and via Castleford Junction – Leeds West Junction/Whitwood

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this secondary route is based in West Yorkshire and stretches from Knottingley in the East to Thornhill Junction (near Mirfield) in a westerly direction and Leeds in a northerly direction.

This is a multi section of approximately 45 miles of double track route. It consists of a number of urban lines and a selection of routes carrying West and South Yorkshire Passenger Transport Executive sponsored passenger services and freight. Between Normanton and Leeds passenger rail services link the East Midlands and South Yorkshire to West Yorkshire.

The major stations outside Leeds are Castleford, Pontefract Monkhill and Wakefield Kirkgate. The route contains 17 level crossings plus a major structure, namely Methley Viaduct (TJC3/222), brick construction (five spans).

On the route between Altofts Junction and Leeds there are two major freight terminals; Wakefield Europort and Leeds Stourton (Hunslet). Both provide an important intermodal freight link between East Anglian ports and West Yorkshire. There is also a freight yard situated at Healey Mills on this route. (See Freight Route Specification H.91 for further information.)

181

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route Knottingley – Mirfield (via Crofton Junction)/Castleford and via Castleford Junction) – Leeds West Description Junction/Whitwood

Section Start CPM1 56m 924 yds Pontefract Monkhill), CPM2 0m 0 yds (Castleford W. Junction.), ELN 195m 433 yds (Leeds), MEW 1m 314yds (Methley Junction.), MVN2 39m 703 yds (Mirfield E. Junction.), NOC 23m 1262 yds (Altoft Junction.), TJC3 184m 1177 yds ( Goose Hill Junction.), WAG1 47m 781 yds (Wakefield Kirkgate), WWK 0m 0 yds (Wakefield)

Section End CPM1 59m 66 yds (Knottingley E. Junction), CPM2 0m 1342 yds (Cutsyke Junction.), ELN 195m 1144 yds, MEW 0m 0 yds (Whitwood Junction.), MVN2 48m 726 yds (Wakefield Kirkgate), NOC 20m 1606 yds (Castleford), TJC3 195m 817 yds (Leeds), WAG1 57m 1184 yds (Pontefract E. Junction.), WWK 0m 572 yds (Wakefield)

Route 8, 9 9 9 Availability (RA)

Gauge W6, W8, W9 W9 W9

Signals Mixture of track circuit Mixture of track circuit Subject to the rollout block and absolute block and absolute programme of block. block. European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed Predominant Raise linespeed to To be advised. linespeed 60 miles highest possible in line See Sectional per hour (mph) with infrastructure Appendix for except for Methley characteristics and detailed speed Junction to Whitwood capability of rolling profile. Junction which is stock. 30mph.

Electrified Not electrified. Not electrified. Not electrified.

182 Current passenger train service level (trains per hour) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Typical Knottingley – Wakefield Kirkgate 25 minutes. end to end Castleford – Leeds 23 minutes. Journey time Normanton – Leeds 32 minutes.

No. of Mirfield East Junction – Thornhill LNW Junction 6 trains Train lengthening To be trains per per hour (tph) plus 3 trans per day (tpd) Long Distance into Leeds in advised. hour High Speed (LDHS). peak hours.

Thornhill LNW Junction – Horbury Junction 1 tph plus 3 2 tph Mirfield tpd LDHS. East Junction and Thornhill Horbury Junction – Wakefield Kirkgate 3 tph plus 3 tpd LNW Junction. LDHS.

Wakefield Kirkgate – Wakefield Westgate 1 tph.

Wakefield Kirkgate – Turners Lane 3 tph.

Normanton – Altofts 3 tph Sheffield to Leeds.

Altofts to Methley 2 tph Sheffield to Leeds.

Altofts – Whitwood 1 tph Sheffield to Leeds via Castleford.

Whitwood Junction – Castleford 3 tph Sheffield to Leeds and Knottingley to Leeds.

Whitwood Junction – Methley Junction 2 tph.

Methley Junction – Leeds 4 tph including services from Sheffield (3) and Knottingley (1).

Castleford – Pontefract West Junction 1 tph.

Wakefield Kirkgate to Pontefract West Junction 1 tph plus 3 Bradford to London services.

Pontefract West Junction – Pontefract East Junction 2 tph plus 3 Bradford to London services.

All the above applies in each direction.

183

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains All based on weekday. As per the Strategic Freight As per the Strategic per day Knottingley West Network forecasts. Freight Network Junction – Pontefract forecasts. Monkhill: 27 trains per day, Pontefract Monkhill – Crofton West Junction: 41 trains per day, Crofton West Junction – Calder Bridge Junction: 78 trains per day, Calder Bridge Junction – Wakefield West Junction: 0 trains per day, Whitwood – Methley Junction: 9 trains per day, Methley Junction – Leeds: 2 trains per day, Thornhill LNW Junction -.Horbury Junction 7 trains in each direction. Milford Junction – Castleford 14 tpd in each direction, Castleford – Altofts Junction 7 tpd Down and 3 tpd Up.

All services operate in each direction.

Freight traffic is subject to timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

Level crossings on route Description Current No. of Level + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 7 As determined by the As determined by the Level Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic: 1

User: 10

184 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status Description entation Date

Methley Remodelling of MEW2 2011/12 Improved Under construction Junction junction. performance, journey time and capacity.

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Due Output change Notes Status Description Date

Sheffield to Journey time MVN2 2019 Journey time In development Leeds improvement improvement

Platform To accommodate WAG1 TJC3 2014 – Increased capacity In development lengthening longer trains 2019 Knottingley (exclusive) to Leeds and Wakefield Kirkgate to Leeds (exclusive)

Freight Gauge Provision of NOC 2014 – Capacity to carry deep In development Enhancements: W10/W11/W12 19 sea containers on Altolfts Junction standard deck height to Colton wagons Junction

W10 Gauge Freight gauge TJC3 2014 – Capability to carry deep In development Clearance clearance 2019 sea containers on Felixstowe to improvement standard deck height Yorkshire wagons to Selby (Potter Terminals Group), Wakefield Europort and Stourton.

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

185 SRS H.10 Manchester Victoria – Mirfield (via Rochdale)/Stalybridge

Route specification description

This secondary urban route leads in an easterly direction from Manchester to Mirfield via Rochdale, with another route diverging to Stalybridge. The latter crosses the London North Western/London North Eastern boundary at 22 miles 62 chains on MVN2 just west of Hebden Bridge. The former rural section between Miles Platting Junction and Rochdale East Junction via Oldham has been transferred to Transport for Greater Manchester who will operate this line as part of Manchester Metrolink. There are approximately 46 miles of route in total. Manchester Victoria to Miles Platting Junction is four track with the majority of the remainder being double.

There are fourteen stations on this route including Manchester Victoria and Stalybridge. Manchester Victoria is the major station on this route managed by Northern Rail and has six platforms with services radiating towards Yorkshire, Merseyside and various North West destinations. Other notable stations managed by Northern Rail are Stalybridge, Rochdale, Todmorden, Hebden Bridge and Sowerby Bridge.

The Manchester to Mirfield via Rochdale and Manchester to Stalybridge routes are predominantly passenger routes with occasional freight services. There are two level crossings on this route.

The proposed Northern Hub scheme in CP5 will provide a direct link between Manchester Victoria and Piccadilly stations via a new chord at Ordsall. This will provide opportunities to improve journey times and connectivity between the Calder Valley and the North West regions.

186

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route Manchester Victoria – Mirfield (via Rochdale) / Stalybridge Description

Section Start BBW 0m 0yds Bradley Junction), BPP -0m 197 yds (Phillips Park W. Junction), MPR1 1m 663 yds (Man. Vic.), MPR3 14m 0 yds (Oldham Loop), MVL1 1m 663 yds (Miles Platting), MVL2 7m 1012 yds (Stalybridge), MVM -0m 45 yds (Manchester Victoria), MVN2 2m 365 yds (Thorpe Bridge Junction), MVN2 9m 616 yds (Castleton)

Section End BBW 1m 393yds (Bradley Wood Junction), BPP 0m 525 yds (Brewery Junction), MPR1 2m 387 yds (Thorpes Bridge Junction), MPR3 14m 585 yds (Oldham Loop), MVL1 7m 1013 yds (Stalybridge), MVL2 7m 1630 yds (Stalybridge), MVM 1m 674 yds (Manchester Victoria), MVN2 9m 616 yds (Rochdale), MVN2 37m 779 yds (Heaton Lodge Junction)

Route 8, 9 9 9 Availability (RA)

Gauge W6, W7, W8 W8 W8

Signals Mixture of Track Circuit Mixture of Track Subject to the rollout Block and Absolute Circuit Block and programme of Block. Absolute Block. European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed Predominant Raise linespeed to To be advised. linespeed 60 miles highest possible in line See Sectional per hour (mph). with infrastructure Appendix for characteristics and detailed speed capability of rolling profile. stock.

Electrified Not electrified. Not electrified. Not electrified.

187

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Manchester Victoria – Stalybridge: 15 minutes. and typical Manchester Victoria – Rochdale: 18 minutes. journey time Manchester Victoria – Mirfield: 1 hour 15 minutes.

No. of Manchester – Stalybridge 2 trains per Changes in the number of passenger tph To be trains per hour (tph) in each direction. from December 2011 unless otherwise advised. hour shown: Manchester – Rochdale 4 tph in each direction.  peak train lengthening between Manchester and Rochdale – Hall Royd Junction 3 tph Leeds via Rochdale and via in each direction. Huddersfield in each direction

 peak hour shuttles operating Hall Royd Junction – Milner Royd between Stalybridge and Junction 4 tph in each direction. Manchester 1 tph in each direction December 2013 (See Milner Royd Junction – Greetland Route Specification H.05) Junction 1 tph in each direction  additional 1 tph peak hour Greetland Junction – Bradley Wood shuttles between Rochdale Junction 2 tph in each direction. and Manchester in each direction December 2014 with Bradley Wood Junction – Heaton a further increase of 1 tph at Lodge Junction 1 tph in each peak times proposed under direction. Northern Hub December 2019

 proposed new Burnley to Bradley Junction – Bradley Wood Manchester via Todmorden Junction 1 tph in each direction. direct service in each direction December 2013/14

 additional 1 tph in each direction between Leeds and Manchester via Bradford and Rochdale December 2019

 2 extra inter regional services between Manchester and Leeds per hour in each direction via Diggle and Mirfield East Junction

 lengthening of inter regional services to 6 cars between Manchester and Leeds in each direction by December 2016

188  Further lengthening to 4 cars of peak regional services into Manchester in the morning peak and out of Manchester in the evening peak by December 2019.

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains 2 trains per day operate in As per the Strategic Freight As per the Strategic per day each direction. Network forecasts. Freight Network forecasts.

Freight traffic is subject to timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

Level crossings on route Description Current Number of + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 0 As determined by the As determined by the Level Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 2

189 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 Project Project Description ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status entation Date

Stalybridge Renewal and MVL2 2012/13 Provides improved Under construction Resignalling and provision of a new operational flexibility Capacity turnback platform at that allows more Improvements. Stalybridge efficient use of rolling stock. This will allow the HLOS targets to be met without the need to excessively lengthen platforms.

Stalybridge Improvements to MVL2 2011 – 13 Improved station Under construction improved station station (National facilities. facilities. Stations Improvement Project)

Manchester Improvements to MVM 2011 – 13 Improved station Under construction Victoria Station station (National facilities. refurbishment. Stations Improvement Project)

Rochdale Station Improvements to MVN2 2011 – 13 Improved station Under construction refurbishment. station (National facilities. Stations Improvement Project)

Rochdale Renewal and creation MVN2 2012/13 Changes to facilitate In development resignalling and of a turnback siding conversion of remodelling facing Manchester Oldham Loop to Metrolink.

Todmorden re- Study to provide direct MVN 2013/14 Development work In development instatement of the service with towards improved west curve associated journey connectivity. development time improvements between Burnley and Manchester.

Manchester Leeds Journey Time Capacity MVL3 2013/14 Improved journey In development via Diggle improvements times.

190 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 – 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Due Date Output Notes Status Description change

Northern Hub Station MVE1 December Improved In development Manchester improvements, 2014 station Victoria improved facilities Interchange access and facilities. interchange facilities

Northern Hub New curve. COL December New curve. In development linking 2016 Manchester Piccadilly and Victoria Stations directly via a new curve at Ordsall

Northern Hub. Journey time SAJ 2019 Journey time In development and and connectivity connectivity improvements improvements. between Bradford and Manchester

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

191 SRS H.11 Hull – Seamer

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks &Humber and North West, this rural route leads in a north and easterly direction out of Hull to Bridlington and along the coast line to Seamer just south of Scarborough.

The route is double track between Hull and Bridlington and is single track between Bridlington and Seamer South Junction except for a three mile section of double track between Hunmanby and Filey.

The route contains nine stations of which the most significant are Beverley, Bridlington and Filey. The route contains 99 level crossings.

192

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route Hull – Seamer Description

Section Start AWP 0m 0 yds (Anlaby Road Junction), HBS 0m 1290 yds (West Parade North Junction)

Section End AWP 0m 528 yds (West Parade North Junction), HBS 50m 946 yds (Seamer West Junction)

Route 6, 7, 8 7 7 Availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals Mixture of Track Circuit Mixture of Track Subject to the rollout Block and Absolute Circuit Block and programme of Block... Absolute Block... European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed Hull – Bridlington Raise linespeed to To be advised. predominant highest possible in line See Sectional linespeed 70 miles with infrastructure Appendix for per hour (mph) for characteristics and detailed speed passenger services, capability of rolling profiles. Bridlington – Seamer stock. predominant linespeed for passenger services 60 mph. Predominant linespeed for freight is 40mph.

Electrified Not electrified. Not electrified. Not electrified.

193 Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Typical Hull – Seamer, 1hour 20 minutes Hull – Seamer, Hull – Seamer, end to (direct service). 1hour 20 1hour 20 minutes end minutes (direct (direct service). Journey service). time

No. of Currently on the Hull Seamer route No change. No change. No change. trains per there is approximately 1 train per hour hour in each direction.

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains No booked freight traffic. As per the Strategic Freight As per the per day Network forecasts. Strategic Freight Network forecasts.

Level crossings on route Description Current Number of + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 13 As determined by the As determined by the Level Crossing policy. Level Crossing policy. Automatic: 24

User: 62

194 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status Description entation Date

Bridlington Bus/Rail HBS By the Bus/Rail In development Renaissance Interchange end of Interchange Improvements 2014 Improvements

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

No schemes are currently planned for Control Period 5.

195 SRS H.12 York – Scarborough

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this rural route leads in a north easterly direction through North Yorkshire from York to Scarborough on the East Coast via Malton and Seamer.

This is a 42 mile double track route with 92 level crossings.

There are four stations on this route including York. York is the major railway station situated on the East Coast Main Line, managed by East Coast and has 11 platforms offering services to London, the North East, Scotland, Yorkshire, the Midlands, South West, South Coast and the North West of England. Scarborough railway station is managed by First TransPennine Express and has five platforms with services to York, Leeds, Manchester and Liverpool and Northern services to Hull. Malton station has a single platform and therefore makes this small section in essence a single line section for passenger services calling there.

This route is predominately used by First TransPennine Express. Other operators on this route are occasionally East Midlands Trains, Northern Rail with the very occasional freight service.

196

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route York – Scarborough Description

Section Start YMS 0m 32ch (York)

Section End YMS 42m 132 yds (Scarborough)

Route 8 8 8 Availability (RA)

Gauge W6 W6 W6

Signals Mixture of Track Circuit Mixture of Track Subject to the rollout Block and Absolute Circuit Block and programme of Block all controlled Absolute Block all European Rail from York Integrated controlled from York Traffic Management Electronic Control Integrated Electronic System. (ERTMS). Centre. Control Centre.

Speed Predominant Raise linespeed to To be advised. linespeed 90 miles highest possible in line See Sectional per hour (mph) with infrastructure Appendix for characteristics and detailed speed capability of rolling profiles. stock.

Electrified Not electrified. Not electrified. Not electrified.

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey York – Scarborough, 50 minutes. and typical journey time

No. of Currently on the York – Scarborough route No change No trains per there is 1 train per hour throughout the day in passenger change in hour with train lengthening or additional shuttles services per passenger at peak holiday times in each direction. hour. services per hour.

197

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains No booked freight traffic As per the Strategic Freight As per the Strategic per day Network forecast. Freight Network forecast.

Level crossings on route Description Current Number of + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 12 As determined by the As determined by the Level Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic: 10

User: 70

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 Project Project Description ELR Implementation Output Notes Status Date change

York to Journey time YMS 2019 Improved In development Scarborough improvement journey times

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

No schemes are currently planned for Control Period 5.

198 SRS H.13 Chesterfield – Swinton via Sheffield

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this primary route extends northwards from Tapton Junction (near Chesterfield) to Swinton Junction and the Rotherham area. The route services several distinct passenger markets. The first is for cross country journeys linking Scotland, the North East, Yorkshire, the Midlands, Thames Valley and the South West. The second is the interurban links provided by First TransPennine Express (TPE) and East Midlands Trains (EMT) linking Sheffield with Manchester, London, the East Midlands, East Anglia, South Yorkshire, West Yorkshire and South Humberside. The third is between intermediate locations on the route and the above areas by direct services or by changing trains onto long distance services at Sheffield. The route also carries local services within South Yorkshire most of which are sponsored by South Yorkshire Passenger Transport Executive.

There are four stations on the line of routes within this SRS. Sheffield is the major station comprising of eight platforms. This station is served by EMT, TPE, Northern Rail (Northern) and CrossCountry. Other key stations are Dronfield, Meadowhall and Rotherham. Meadowhall is a four platform station situation where the route diverges to Swinton and Barnsley. Rotherham Central is a two platform station situated on the chord between Meadowhall and Swinton/Doncaster. Sheffield station provides an important interchange facility between long distance passenger services to/from London, Northern East England, Scotland, East Midlands and South East, South West England and the regional centres of Manchester, West and South Yorkshire and Lincolnshire.

There is a Train Maintenance Depot for stabling and servicing the Northern fleet at Sheffield. Sheffield station is also used to stable a number of diesel vehicles.

199 The Tapton Junction to Sheffield to Moorthorpe/Doncaster corridor features 11 flat junctions (excluding Sheffield stations and Doncaster station within a 28 mile stretch.

It is a two track railway with an up and down passenger loop at Brightside, a currently disused loop at Rotherham Masborough.

The chord via Rotherham and the primary freight route between Aldwarke and Mexborough (see H.14 Swinton – Brocklesby Junction) together with Sheffield station permits the regulation of services.

The route contains three level crossings and three tunnels.

This SRS contains a secondary route from Rotherham Central to Aldwarke Junction.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route Chesterfield – Swinton (via Sheffield) Description

Section Start ANS 6m 1518 yds (Aldwarke Lane Junction ), HCD 0m 0 yds (Holmes Junction), TJC1 146m 1298 yds ((Tapton Junction), TJC2 160m 748 yds (Grimesthorpe Junction), TJC3 161m 1694 yds (Masborough), WME 4m 880yds (Rotherham C. Junction)

Section End ANS 7m 560 yds (Aldwarke Junction S.), HCD 0m 1360 yds (Rotherham C. Junction), TJC1 160m 748 yds (Grimesthorpe Junction), TJC2 163m 1628 yds (Masborough), TJC3 166m 1298 yds ((Swinton South Junction), WME 6m 1518yds ((Aldwarke Junction S.)

Route 8, 10 10 10 Availability

Gauge W6, W8 W9 W10

Signals Track circuit block. Track circuit block. Subject to the rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed 90 miles per hour 90 mph 90 mph (mph) See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles.

Electrified Not electrified. Sheffield to Sheffield to Swinton Electrification of this route is Rotherham 750 DC route 25kV OHL an option in the electrification for Tram Electrification. Electrification Programme. Train

Sheffield to Swinton route 25kV OHL Electrification.

200

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Joutney 50 minutes (weekday, Dronfield 50 minutes (weekday, Dronfield 50 minutes (weekday, and – Swinton) – Swinton) Dronfield – Swinton) Typical end to end Journey time

No. of Tapton Junction to Dore Station Changes in number of 1 additional Long Distance trains per Junction 6 trains per hour (tph) passenger trains per hour : High Speed tph in each hour direction. Dore Station Junction to  Train lengthening Sheffield 9 tph between Sheffield to Leeds corridor via Sheffield to Nunnery Main Line Moorthorpe between Junction 11 tph Sheffield and Swinton by December 2014. Nunnery Main Line Junction to Wincobank Station Junction 10 tph

Wincobank Station Junction to Holmes Junction 7 tph

Holmes Junction to Aldwarke Junction direct 4 tph

Holmes Junction to Aldwarke via Rotherham Central 3 tph

Aldwarke Junction to Swinton 7 tph

In addition there are 2 trains per day (tpd) Sheffield to York via Rotherham plus 5 tpd between Leeds and London via Sheffield.

(all above in each direction)

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains 12 tpd in each direction As per the Strategic Freight As per the Strategic Freight per day Network forecasts. Network forecasts.

Freight traffic is subject to timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

201

Level crossings on route Description Current Number of + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 2 As determined by the As determined by the . Level Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 1

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 Project Project ELR Implementation Output Notes Status Description Date change

Tram Train Sheffield to TJC3 2013/14 Tram train In development Trial Rotherham trial. Parkgate.

Midland Main Enhanced TJC1 2014 Line speed In development Line St Pancras infrastructure improvement. International – capability Sheffield Line Speed Improvement

Rotherham Station WME 2014 Improved Under construction Central Station improvement station/longer platform

202

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 – 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project Description ELR Due Date Output change Notes Status

Aldwarke S&C Renewal TJC3/WME 2014 – Renewal of asset. In development 16

Aldwarke Connectivity and TJC3/WME 2014 – Increased capacity. In development capacity 16 improvements

Holmes S&C Renewal HCD/TJC2 2014 – Renewal of asset. In development Junction 16

Holmes Capacity and HCD/TJC2 2014 – Increased capacity. In development Junction performance 16 improvements

Sheffield Revised layout TJC1 2019 Improved In development station (Dore Station connectivity and Junction – Nunnery capacity. Main Line Junction)

Sheffield to Journey time TJC1 TJC2 2019 Improved journey In development Leeds improvement TJC3 times.

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

203 SRS H.14 Swinton Junction – Brocklesby Junction

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this primary route leads in a north easterly direction out of Swinton in South Yorkshire to Doncaster and along the South Humberside main line towards Thorne Junction, Scunthorpe and Brocklesby Junction.

This is a route of approximately 47 miles comprising mainly double track with the exception of Kirk Sandall to Thorne Junction which is four track, with a three track section between Wrawby Junction and Brocklesby Junction. This SRS also contains a Primary Freight route between Aldwarke Junction and Mexborough.

There are ten stations excluding Doncaster within this Route Specification, with seven between Barnetby and Doncaster (exclusive) and three between Doncaster (exclusive) and Swinton (inclusive). Scunthorpe is the key station along the route. All stations are managed by Northern Rail with the exception of Scunthorpe and Barnetby which are managed by First TransPennine Express.

Passenger services operate to Cleethorpes, Grimsby, Doncaster, Sheffield, Manchester, Lincoln and Barton on Humber. The route also crosses the East Coast Main Line at Doncaster and this provides an important passenger interchange with services to London, the North East and West Yorkshire.

Whilst this route carries an hourly interurban passenger service between Cleethorpes and South Yorkshire and regional passenger services between Hull/Scunthorpe and South Yorkshire, the route is primarily used by freight with some of the highest tonnage movements in the United Kingdom operating on the south bank of the Humber between the port of Immingham, Scunthorpe and Doncaster. Circa 60 freight trains per day operate each way on the core section between Brocklesby and Wrawby Junction carrying coal for the power

204 stations, importing fuel for the steel works at Scunthorpe, imported iron ore for Scunthorpe steel works, steel production from Scunthorpe and oil products from the Humber port to various destinations. There is an extensive freight yard at Scunthorpe serving the Tata Steel Works and the Foreign Ore Terminal. There are also Up and Down goods loops at Scunthorpe. See Route Specification H.98 Freight Trunk Routes.

Another section with significant freight flows in the Swinton/Doncaster/Rotherham/Chesterfield via Sheffield axis which sees considerable amount of through freight traffic between the North East and the Yorkshire and Humber region, and the Midlands and South West.

At Hexthorpe Junction the route diverges with passenger trains travelling towards Doncaster. Most freight takes the diverging route towards Bentley Junction thus avoiding Doncaster (see Route Specification H.91). The South Yorkshire Joint Line from Brancliffe East Junction joints at Kirk Sandall Junction. This is another freight only route avoiding Doncaster (see Route Specification H.91). Approximately three miles further east at Hatfield and Stainforth the freight only route from the Aire Valley Power Stations and the East Coast Main Line joins the South Humber Main Line (see Route Specification H.91). A further mile west sees the route diverge towards Goole and Hull (see Route Specification H.08) with the main line continuing eastwards towards Scunthorpe/Cleethorpes and the Humber Ports at Immingham. Finally, another freight only line to Roxby joins the South Humber Main Line at Scunthorpe.

This route contains 48 levels crossings, one tunnel and several major structures, namely:

 Keadby Drawbridge (DOW27), steel construction, 1 span

 King George V Bridge (Keadby Lift Bridge) (DOW 36), steel construction, 5 spans

 Frodingham Viaduct (DOW39), brick construction (84 spans).

205

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route Swinton – Brocklesby Junction Description

Section Start DOW 0m 0 yds (Marshgate Junction), MAC3 93m 660 yds (Wrawby Junction), MAC3 98m 376 yds (Brocklesby), PED4 15m 880 yds (Masborough), PED5 15m 1408 yds (Barnsley Junction), SJM1 166m 1249 yds (Swinton Junction South), SJM2 15m 79 yds (Mexborough), WME 7m 1320 yds (Aldwarke)

Section End DOW 33m 748 yds (Wrawby Junction), MAC3 98m 376 yds (Brocklesby), MAC3 99m 485 yds (Brocklesby Junction), PED4 15m 1408 yds ((Mexborough), PED5 22m 1232 yds (St. James’s Junction), SJM1 167m 385 yds (Barnsley Junction), SJM2 15m 880 yds (Goldthorpe), WME 10m 418 yds (Mexborough East Junction)

Route 8 8 8 Availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W9, W10 and W12 W9, W10 and W12

Signals Mixture of track circuit Mixture of track circuit Subject to the rollout block and absolute block and absolute programme of block. block. European Rail Traffic Management System. (ERTMS).

Speed Swinton to Doncaster Swinton to Doncaster Swinton to Doncaster predominant predominant predominant See Sectional linespeed 75 miles linespeed 75 miles linespeed 75 miles per Appendix for per hour (mph) per hour (mph) hour (mph) detailed speed profile. Doncaster to Doncaster to Doncaster to Stainforth Stainforth Stainforth predominant predominant predominant linespeed 80 mph linespeed 80 mph linespeed 80 mph

Stainforth to Stainforth to Stainforth to Brocklesby Brocklesby Brocklesby predominant predominant predominant linespeed 55 mph linespeed 75 mph linespeed 75 mph

Electrified Not electrified. Swinton to Doncaster Swinton to Doncaster Electrification of this route is route 25kV OHL route 25kV OHL an option in the Electrification Electrification. Electrification. Programme.

206

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Swinton – Doncaster: local stopping service 17 minutes, 13 minutes passing fast interregional and services. typical journey Doncaster – Scunthorpe 25 minutes fast interregional service and 38 minutes slow stopping time service.

Scunthorpe – Brocklesby passing fast interregional service 24 minutes.

No. of Swinton to Hexthorpe Junction 5 trains Changes in number of passenger 1 additional trains per per hour (tph) trains per hour: Long hour Distance Hexthorpe Junction to Doncaster 5 tph  Train lengthening of inter High Speed regional services up to 4 tph over Doncaster to Kirk Sandall 4 tph cars in each direction Swinton between Cleethorpes and Junction Kirk Sandall to Thorne Junction 6 tph Manchester International South. Airport by December Thorne Junction to Scunthorpe 2 tph 2019 to provide adequate capacity west of Scunthorpe to Wrawby Junction 1 tph Doncaster.

Wrawby Junction to Brocklesby Junction 1 tph interregional plus 7 tpd between Grimsby and Lincoln/Newark.

(above applies in each direction)

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains 60 tpd Brocklesby Junction As per the Strategic As per the Strategic Freight per day to Wrawby Junction. Freight Network forecasts. Network forecasts.

60 tpd in each direction Wrawby Junction to Scunthorpe Foreign Ore Junction.

60 tpd in each direction Scunthorpe Foreign Ore Junction to Hatfield.

Freight traffic is subject to timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

207

Level crossings on route Description Current Number of Level + 10 Years Number of Level + 30 Years Number of Level Notes of Level Crossings Crossings Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 8 As determined by the Level As determined by the Level . Crossing policy Crossing policy Automatic: 3

User: 37

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 Project Project ELR Implem- Output change Notes Status Description entation Date

Scunthorpe area S&C S&C renewals DOW 2012 Renewal of asset. Under Renewals construction

Doncaster – Doncaster DOW 2013/14 Journey time In development Scunthorpe Journey Wrawby improvements. Time improvements).

W10 Gauge Freight gauge PED5 2014 Freight gauge In development Improvements Water clearance PED4 improvements Orton to Doncaster SMJ2 TJC3

Conisbrough Tunnel LSI 50 mph-75 PED5 2013/14 Line speed In development Line Speed mph, Up fast improvement. Improvement and Down fast (LSI)/Gauge improvement.

Hatfield and Stainforth S&C Renewal DOW 2013/14 Renewal of asset. In development Junction.

Hatfield Stainforth Performance DOW 2014 Journey time In development Junction: easing the and freight improvements. approach control. journey time improvement

208

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project Description ELR Due Date Output change Notes Status

Wrawby – Signalling renewal MAC3, DOW 2014 – 16 Renewal of asset. In development Barnetby Resignalling

Humber Road Capacity MAC3, DOW 2014 – 16 Capacity In development Junction- improvements improvements Scunthorpe

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

209 SRS H.15 South Kirkby Junction – Swinton Junction

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorkshire and Humber and North West, this secondary route covers leads in a south westerly direction from South Kirkby Junction to Swinton in South Yorkshire and forms part of the South Yorkshire rail network.

It is a relatively short section of approximately eight miles of route, all double track. This route includes five stations, all managed by Northern Rail, with services to Leeds and Sheffield. All have two platforms except Swinton station which has three platforms with services to Doncaster, Wakefield, Leeds, Rotherham, Sheffield and York.

The route contains two level crossings.

210

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route South Kirkby Junction Swinton Description

Section Start SKM 0m 110 yds, SMJ1 166m 1298 yds, SMJ2 11m 528 yds

Section End SKM 0m 1232 yds, SMJ1 168m 1408 yds, SMJ2 17m 330 yds

Route 8 9 9 Availability (RA)

Gauge W8 Retain as now W8. W10

Signals Track circuit block Track circuit block Subject to the roll out programme of the European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed 80 miles per hour. Passenger: 100 miles Passenger: 100 per hour. Freight: 75 miles per hour. miles per hour (up to Freight: 75 miles RA8), 60 miles per hour per hour (up to (above RA8). South RA8), 60 miles per Kirkby Junction hour (above RA8). Swinton 50 miles per South Kirkby hour for both passenger Junction Swinton and freight. 50 miles per hour for both passenger and freight.

Electrified Not electrified. Swinton South Junction to To be advised. Dearne Junction, Dearne Junction to Moorthorpe Junction and Moorthorpe Junction to South Kirby Junction 25kV AC.

211

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey South Kirkby Junction Swinton, 15 South Kirkby Junction South Kirkby Junction and minutes (weekday). Swinton, 15 minutes Swinton, 15 minutes typical (weekday). (weekday). journey time

No. of On the Moorthorpe to Swinton Changes in passenger train To be advised. trains per route there is roughly 2 trains services per hour : per hour throughout the day in hour each direction plus 4 trans per day London to Leeds via  train lengthening Sheffield plus 2 trains per day up to 4 cars by Sheffield to York between December 2014 on Swinton and Moorthorpe. the Leeds to Sheffield via Moorthorpe corridor

 CrossCountry aspire to operate an additional 1 train per hour from December 2016.

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains Swinton Junction - Rotherham Masborough To be advised. per day Moorthorpe: 23 trains pre Swinton – Moorthorpe, day (weekday). an increase of 8 freight trains per day in each Moorthorpe South Kirkby: direction by 2030. 24 trains per day (weekday). Moorthorpe to South Kirkby, an increase of 2 freight trains per day in each direction by 2030.

Moorthorpe Milford Junction, an increase of 6 freight trans per day in each direction by 2030.

Freight traffic is subject to timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

212 Level crossings on route Description Current Number of + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 0 0. 0.

Automatic: 1 As determined by the Level As determined by the Level Crossing policy Crossing policy User: 1

Infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project Description ELR Implementation Output Notes Status Date change

Moorthorpe Signal Including linespeed SMJ2 2011 Resignalling/ Under Interlocking increases, capacity passenger construction improvements and loops converting

the up and down loops to Passenger status

Bolton on Dearne Level crossing closures SMJ2 2011 Footbridges Under and Moorthorpe construction

W10 Gauge Freight gauge clearance SMJ1, 2013/14 Gauge In Clearance Water improvement. SMJ2 improvement development Orton and Doncaster/Swinto SKM n and South Kirkby route between Swinton and South Kirkby.

213 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project Description ELR Due Date Output change Notes Status

Platform lengthening To accommodate SMJ1 CP5 Platform In development South Yorkshire longer trains. and lengthening (between Sheffield SMJ2 and Leeds via Moorthorpe)

South Kirkby Resignalling of South SKM 2015/16 Resignalling/ren In development Resignalling/ Kirkby control area and ewals Wakefield Westgate targeted renewal of lineside renewals lineside signalling equipment for Wakefield Westgate control area

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

214 SRS H.16 Sheffield – Gainsborough

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this secondary route leads in an easterly direction from Sheffield Nunnery Main Line Junction to Trent Junctions just west of Gainsborough Central via Worksop. It serves stations in Nottinghamshire and Lincolnshire including Kiveton, Worksop, and Retford, before diverging towards Gainsborough Central/Gainsborough Lea Road and Lincoln. It comprises a section of approximately 33 miles of route, all double track with freight sidings at Worksop, a passing loop at Gringley Road near Retford.

There are seven stations served by an hourly service with some additional peak services between Sheffield and Retford. The route carries significant coal traffic to the lower Trent Valley power stations at Cottam and West Burton from the Yorkshire and Humber region, the North East and from the East Midlands coalfields to the Aire Valley power stations.

Worksop and Retford are the main stations on this route. Worksop is managed by Northern Rail whilst Retford Low Level is managed by East Coast Trains.

The freight only route to Stocksbridge diverges from this route at Nunnery Junction and at Brancliffe East Junction the South Yorkshire Joint Line diverges towards Doncaster and Kirk Sandall Junction. See Route specification H.98 for further details.

The route contains 26 level crossings and one major tunnel.

215 Finally this Route Specification includes the single track link at Retford from Thrumpton West Junction to Retford Western Junction linking the Sheffield to Retford route with the East Coast Main Line at Retford.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route Sheffield – Gainsborough Description

Section Start NUJ1/2 158m 1694 yds (Nunnery Main Line Junction), NUJ2 159m 726 yds/41m 1496 yds Nunnery Junction), MAC3 42m 638 yds (Woodburn Junction), WHR 63m 616 yds (Thrumpton West Junction)

Section End NUJ1/2 159m 726 yds.41m 1496 yds (Nunnery Junction), MAC3 42m 638 yds (Woodburn Junction), MAC3 73m 242 yds (Trent West Junction), WHR 63m 638 yds, (Retford Western Junction)

Route 8 8 8 Availability (RA)

Gauge W6, W7, W8, W9 W9 W9

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Subject to the rollout and Absolute Block and Absolute Block programme of Woodburn Junction to Woodburn Junction to European Rail Traffic Woodhouse Junction. Woodhouse Junction. Management System. (ERTMS).

Speed Predominant 75 mph. 75 mph. linespeed 60 miles See Sectional per hour (mph). Appendix for detailed speed profiles.

Electrified Not electrified. Not electrified. Not electrified.

216 Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Sheffield – Retford 40 minutes and typical Sheffield – Lincoln 1 hours 24 minutes journey time

No. of Sheffield – Retford 1 train per Changes in number of passenger train To be trains per hour (tph) in each direction. services per hour: advised. hour  Peak train lengthening up to three cars between Sheffield and Retford/Lincoln in each direction by December 2013.

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains Woodburn Junction – As per the Strategic As per the Strategic Freight per day Brancliffe East Junction 5 Freight Network forecasts. Network forecasts. tpd in each direction.

Brancliffe East Junction to Worksop 12 tpd in each direction.

Worksop to Cottam Power Station and West Burton Power Station 89 tpd in each direction.

Freight traffic is subject to timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

Level crossings on route Description of Current Number of + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes Level Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 5 As determined by Level As determined by Level Crossing policy Crossing policy Automatic: 2

User: 19

217 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 Project Project ELR Implementation Date Output change Notes Description

Thrumpton Signalling MAC3 By December 2013 Renewal of asset. Under construction Signal renewal. Resignalling

Thrumpton S&C MAC3 By December 2012 Renewal of asset. Under construction S&C Renewals Renewals

Woodburn Signalling MAC3 2013/14 Renewal of asset. In development Junction – renewal Woodhouse Junction

Woodburn Capacity MAC3 2013/14 Improved capacity, In development Junction – improvements performance and Woodhouse access. Junction

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

No schemes are currently planned for Control Period 5.

218 SRS H.17 South Transpennine: Dore – Hazel Grove

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this secondary interurban route leads in a westerly direction from Dore, south of Sheffield in South Yorkshire, through the Hope Valley (Hathersage and Edale) via New Mills South Junction to Hazel Grove, in the metropolitan borough of Stockport, Greater Manchester.

It is a section of approximately 30 miles of route, all double track with a change of boundary from London North Eastern to London North Western at Dore West Junction. There is down loop and Cement freight terminal at Earles. A freight line diverges at Chinley towards Buxton (see Freight Route Specification H98) and the route diverges at New Mills South Junction towards Hazel Gove and Romiley.

The route between Dore and New Mills South Junction contains seven stations. These consist of two platforms with the exception of Dore which is a single platform. All are managed by Northern Rail, with services to Sheffield and Manchester. The route from New Mills South Junction to Hazel Grove East Junction does not have any stations. At Hazel Grove East the route converges with the Buxton to Manchester route.

The Hope Valley line carries considerable aggregates traffic from the Peak District quarries and traffic connected with Hope Cement Works to the North East, East Midlands, North West and London/South east. The freight route from Buxton and the Peak Forest joins this route at Chinley (see Route Specification H.98). The route also carries some freight between Manchester and South Humberside.

219 The route carries three distinct passenger services between Manchester and Sheffield. First TransPennine Express and East Midlands Trains services traverse the Pennines providing an interurban link between Manchester, Stockport and Sheffield. The third is the local serving the intermediate stations on the route.

The route contains three major tunnels.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route South TransPennine: Dore Junction – Hazel Grove East Junction. Description

Section Start DWS 0m 0 yds (Dore West Junction.), MAS 153m 1650 yds (Dore South Junction.), TTA1 168m 855 yds (Chinley North Junction.), NMC1 172m 235 yds (New Mills South Junction.), HGC 2m 759 yds (Hazel Grove High Level Junction.)

Section End DWS 0m 1343 yds (Dore Station Junction), MAS 174m 29 yds (Chinley North Junction), TTA1 172m 439 yds (New Mills South Junction), NMC1 177m 880 yds (Hazel Grove High Level Junction), HGC 2m 1383 yds (Hazel Grove East Junction)

Route 8 8 8 Availability (RA)

Gauge W6, W7 W6, W7 W6, W7

Signals Mixture of absolute block Mixture of absolute block Subject to the rollout and track circuit block. and track circuit block. programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed Predominant linespeed Raise linespeed to To be advised. 90 miles per hour highest possible in line See Sectional (mph). with infrastructure Appendix for characteristics and detailed speed capability of rolling stock. profiles

Electrified Not electrified. Not electrified. Not electrified.

220 Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Manchester – Dore local stopper 1 hours 8 minutes and typical Manchester – Dore fast passing 45 minutes journey time

No. of Dore Station Junction to New Mills Train lengthening up to 4 cars in To be advised. trains per South Junction 3 trains per hour in December 2012 on interregional Liverpool hour each direction. to Norwich services in each direction.

New Mills South Junction to Hazel Train lengthening up to 4 cars in Grove 2 trains per hour in each December 2011 on an evening peak local direction. Manchester to Sheffield service.

Northern Hub service specification December 2019 for four fast services per hour in each direction plus a stopping train service every two hours in each direction.

Train Lengthening of inter regional services in each direction of up to 4 cars between Cleethorpes and Manchester International Airport by December 2019 to provide adequate capacity west of Doncaster.

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains Chinley to Dore 22 tpd in As per the Strategic Freight As per the Strategic Freight per day each direction. Network forecasts. Network forecasts.

Freight traffic is subject to timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

Level crossings on route Description Current No. of Level + 10 Years No. of Level + 30 Years No. of Notes of Level Crossings Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level As determined by Level There are no level Crossing policy. Crossing policy. crossings in this SRS. Automatic: 0

User: 0

221

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 Project Project ELR Implementation Output change Notes Status Description Date

Cowburn Tunnel Permanent MAS 2013/14 Journey time In Journey time Speed improvements. development improvements Restriction removal

Hope Valley to Train MAS, DWS 2013/14 To accommodate In London lengthening longer freight trains. development (freight)

Platform To accommodate MAS 2014 Increase capacity. Under extensions at longer trains. construction Hathersage

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 – 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Due Output Notes Status Descriptio Date change n

Dore and Totley resignalling Renewal DWS, MAS 2014 – Renewal of In 19 asset. development

Hope Valley Resignalling Renewal DWS, MAS, 2014 – Renewal of In TTA1, NMC1, 19 asset. development HGC

Dore Station Junction doubling. Capacity & MAS 2014 – Capacity In Performan 19 improvement. development ce improvem ent

Manchester to Sheffield Capacity, HGC, NMC1, 2014 – Capacity, In Journey Time/Capacity journey TTA1, MAS 19 journey time development Improvements under the time and improvements. Northern Hub including performan additional tracks in the Hope or ce Grindleford area so faster trains improvem can overtake slower services. ent

222 Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Due Output Notes Status Descriptio Date change n

Northern Hub/Strategic Freight Capacity, DWS, MAS, 2014 – In Network New Dore South Curve journey TTA1, NMC1, 19 development to provide independent time and HGC standage. performan ce improvem ent

Platform lengthening Sheffield Capacity MAS 2014 – Capacity In to Manchester improvem 19 improvement development ent .

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

223 SRS H.18 Sheffield Meadowhall – Horbury Junction

Route specification description Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this secondary urban route leads in a northerly direction from Sheffield Meadowhall in South Yorkshire, through Barnsley and Darton to Horbury Junction in Wakefield, West Yorkshire.

This route is approximately twenty one miles, all double track and contains five stations. All the stations on this route are managed by Northern Rail and consist of two platforms, offering services to Sheffield, Leeds, Huddersfield and Nottingham. Barnsley and Meadowhall are the principal stations on this route. The latter has four platforms with two platforms serving this route and a further two serving the Sheffield to Doncaster/Leeds rail corridor.

The route to Penistone and Huddersfield diverges at Barnsley.

The route contains three level crossings, two major tunnels and one major structure, namely Swaithe Viaduct (SHB63), steel construction (ten spans).

224

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Sheffield Meadowhall – Horbury Junction Route Description

Section SHB 161m 1144 yds (Wincobank Junction.), PED2 7m 1100 yds (Quarry Junction.), BAH2 52m Start 1320 yds (Barnsley Station Junction.), CHS 1m 1166 yds (Crigglestone Junction.)

Section End SHB 173m 1056 yds (Quarry Junction), PED2 6m 946 yds (Barnsley Station Junction.), BAH2 45m 1232 yds (Crigglestone Junction.), CHS 0m 0 yds (Horbury Junction.)

Route 6, 7 6, 7 7 Availability (RA)

Gauge W6A W6A W6A

Signals Mixture of Track Circuit Block Mixture of Track Circuit Block Subject to the rollout and Absolute Block. and Absolute Block. programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed Predominant linespeed 70 80 miles per hour. 80 miles per hour. miles per hour (mph). See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles.

Electrified Not electrified. Not electrified. Not electrified.

225

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Meadowhall to Wakefield Kirkgate: Meadowhall to Wakefield Meadowhall to and 35 minutes. Kirkgate: 35 minutes. Wakefield Kirkgate: 35 typical minutes. journey time

No. of Wincobank Junction to Barnsley 4 Changes in the number of To be advised. trains per trains per hour in each direction. passenger trains per hour: hour Barnsley to Horbury Junction 3 trains per hour in each direction.  Train lengthening by December 2019 on the Sheffield to Leeds via Barnsley corridor.

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains Sheffield to Meadowhall there are As per the As per the Strategic Freight per day approximately 12 trains per day in Strategic Freight Network forecasts. each direction. Network forecasts.

There are no booked freight services between Meadowhall and Horbury Junction.

Freight traffic is subject to timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

Level crossings on route Description Current Number of + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 1 As determined by the As determined by the Level Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 2

226 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

No schemes are currently planned for Control Period 4.

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Due Output Notes Status Description Date change

Sheffield – Leeds Journey time SHB, 2018/1 Journey time In development improvements PED2, 9 improvement including BAH2, s Horbury CHS Junction remodelling.

Platform extensions To SHB, 2014 – Increased In development between Sheffield and accommodate BAH2 19 capacity Leeds (exclusive) via longer trains Barnsley. (Chapeltown).

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

227 SRS H.19 Brocklesby Junction – Cleethorpes

Route specification description Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this secondary route leads in a south easterly direction from Brocklesby Junction, through Habrough and Grimsby Town and onto Cleethorpes on the East Coast.

This is a relatively short section of approximately 13 miles of route forming part of the South Humberside main line from Doncaster to the east coast towns of Grimsby and Cleethorpes. It is double track as far as Grimsby Town where it becomes single track for almost three miles into Cleethorpes, with the exception of a short loop near Grimsby Docks station.

The route contains eight stations with the main stations being Grimsby Town and Cleethorpes. The majority of the stations are managed by Northern Rail, whilst Grimsby Town and Cleethorpes are managed by First TransPennine Express.

Services using this route provide a direct link between North East Lincolnshire and South Yorkshire, the North West of England and the East Midlands.

The route contains 25 level crossings.

228

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route Brocklesby Junction – Cleethorpes Description

Section Start MAC3, 112 miles 918 yards (Cleethorpes)

Section End MAC3, 99 miles 485 yds (Brocklesby Junction.)

Route 8 8 8 Availability (RA)

Gauge W6, W7, W8 W8 W8

Signals Mixture of Track Circuit Mixture of Track Subject to the rollout Block and Absolute Circuit Block and programme of Block. Absolute Block. European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed Predominant Raise linespeed to To be advised. linespeed 60 miles highest possible in line See Sectional per hour (mph) with infrastructure Appendix for Brocklesby to characteristics and detailed speed Grimsby. capability of rolling profile. stock. Predominant linespeed Grimsby to Cleethorpes is 40 mph.

Electrified Not electrified. Not electrified. Not electrified.

229

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Brocklesby Junction – Brocklesby Junction – Cleethorpes, 25 Brocklesby Junction – and Cleethorpes, 25 minutes minutes passing interregional service Cleethorpes, 25 typical passing interregional minutes passing journey service interregional service time

No. of 1 train per hour Changes in number of passenger trains per To be advised. trains per interregional hour: Cleethorpes to hour Doncaster 1 train every 2 hours  Train lengthening of interregional Cleethorpes to Barton services of up to 4 cars between on Humber and 7 trains Cleethorpes and Manchester per day between International Airport by December Grimsby and 2019 to provide adequate capacity Lincoln/Newark west of Doncaster. (interregional).

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains 0 trains per day As per the Strategic Freight As per the Strategic Freight per day Network forecasts. Network forecasts.

Level crossings on route Description Current Number of Level + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 8 As determined by the Level As determined by the Level Crossing policy. Crossing policy. Automatic: 4

User: 13

230 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

No schemes are currently planned for Control Period 4.

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Due Date Output Notes Status Description change

Platform To accommodate MAC3 2014 – 19 Increased In development extensions at longer trains. capacity. Habrough.

Brocklesby S&C Renewal MAC3 2014 Renewal In development Junction S&C of asset. Renewal

Wrawby – Signalling renewal MAC3, DOW 2014 – 16 Renewal In development Barnetby of asset. Resignalling

Humber Road Capacity MAC3 DOW 2014 – 16 Increased In development Junction – improvements capacity. Scunthorpe

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

231 SRS H.20 Penistone Line

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this rural route stretches south and east from Huddersfield in the Metropolitan borough of Kirklees through Berry Brow and Denby Dale to Penistone and then through Silkstone Common onto Barnsley in South Yorkshire.

It is a relatively short section of approximately 21 miles of route, mostly single track with passing loops between Stocksmoor and Shepley and at Penistone. The line becomes double track on the approach to Barnsley.

The route between Spring Wood Junction and Barnsley Station Junction contains ten stations; all managed by Northern Rail. Most of the stations are single platforms except for Stocksmoor, Shepley and Penistone. The route contains several major structures, namely:

 Paddock Viaduct (PEH/2), wrought iron and stone construction (20 spans)

 Lockwood Viaduct (PEH/10, stone construction (36 spans)

 Denby Dale Viaduct (PEH/45), stone construction (21 spans).

 The route is designated as a Community Rail Route.

There are 16 level crossings on this route.

The route has one long tunnel and six smaller tunnels as it crosses the Pennines.

232

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route Penistone Line: Huddersfield Spring Wood Junction to Barnsley Station Junction Description

Section Start PEH 0m 880 yds (Springwood Junction), PED1 28m 683 yds (Huddersfield Junction.), PED2 0m 0 yds (West Silkstone Junction).

Section End PEH 13m 924 yds (Huddersfield Junction.), PED1 29m 286 yds (West Silkstone Junction.), PED2 6m 946 yds (Barnsley Station Junction).

Route 2, 8 8 8 Availability (RA)

Gauge W6 Retain as now/W6 Retain as now/W6

Signals Track circuit block. Track circuit block. Subject to the rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed Predominant linespeed 60 mph. 60 mph. 50 miles per hour See Sectional (mph). Appendix for detailed speed profile.

Electrified Not electrified. Not electrified. Not electrified.

233

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Barnsley – Huddersfield, 48 Barnsley – Huddersfield, Barnsley – and minutes (weekday). 48 minutes (weekday). Huddersfield, 48 typical minutes (weekday). journey time

No. of On the Barnsley to Changes in the number To be advised. trains per Huddersfield route there is 1 of passenger trains per train per hour throughout the hour hour: day.

 Peak train lengthening between Penistone and Sheffield by December 2019.

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains Nil As per the Strategic As per the Strategic Freight per day Freight Network forecasts Network forecasts

Level crossings on route Description Current Number of Level + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes of Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 2 As determined by the Level As determined by the Level Crossing policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 14

234

Planned infrastructure investment works in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

No schemes are currently planned for Control Period 4.

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019) Project Project ELR Due Date Output Notes Status Description change

Capacity on More frequent PEH PED1 2014 – 19 New journey Additional Third Party Proposal. Penistone line service PED2 opportunities. rolling stock between likely to be Huddersfield required and Sheffield via Penistone.

In addition to the proposed enhancement programme, this table includes third party schemes, renewals and potential NRDF schemes where applicable.

235 SRS H.21 Barton-on-Humber Branch

Route specification description Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this rural route is located in North Lincolnshire and stretches south and east from Barton-on-Humber through Thornton Abbey and Ulceby to Harbrough.

This SRS covers approximately 11 miles and is single track from Barton-on-Humber to just south of New Holland when it becomes double track. The line then reverts to single track on the approach to Ulceby where it joins the double track route from Immingham to Brocklesby Junction. There is a single line passenger chord from Ulceby South Junction to Habrough Junction.

The route contains six small stations. The stations at Ulceby, New Holland, Barrow Haven, and Barton-on- Humber are all single platforms with the remaining stations consisting of two platforms. All are managed by Northern Rail.

A shuttle service operates between Cleethorpes and Barton-on-Humber, whilst there are additional services to Grimsby, Newark North Gate and Manchester Airport from Habrough.

The route contains 31 level crossings.

236

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of Route Barton-on-Humber Branch Description

Section Start BRI1 99m 482 yds (Brocklesby Junction), HAU 0m 858 yds (Habrough Junction), BAR2 100m 682 yds (Ulceby South Junction), BAR 100m 968 yds Ulceby North Junction)

Section End BRI1 100m 682 yds (Ulceby South Junction), HAU 1m 990 yds (Ulceby South Junction), BAR2 100m 968 yds (Ulceby North Junction), BAR 110m 418 yds (Barton on Humber), BAR 110m 418 yds (Barton on Humber)

Route 8 8 8 Availability (RA)

Gauge W6, W8 W8 W8

Signals Mixture of track circuit block Mixture of track circuit block Subject to the rollout and absolute block. and absolute block. programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed Predominant linespeed 60 60 mph. 60 mph. miles per hour (mph). See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profile.

Electrified Not electrified. Not electrified. Not electrified.

Current passenger train service level (trains per hour/day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Journey Barton – on – Humber to Barton – on – Humber to Barton – on – Humber and Cleethorpes, 24 minutes Cleethorpes, 24 minutes to Cleethorpes, 24 typical (weekday). (weekday). minutes (weekday). journey time

No. of On the Barton – on – Humber No change. No change. trains per to Cleethorpes service there is mainly 1 train every two hour hours.

237

Current freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains No booked freight traffic. As per the Strategic Freight As per the Strategic Freight per day Network forecasts. Network forecasts.

Level crossings on route Description of Current Number of Level + 10 Years Number of + 30 Years Number of Notes Level Crossings Level Crossings Level Crossings Crossing

Supervised: 6 As determined by the As determined by the Level Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic: 2

User: 23

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

No schemes are currently planned for Control Period 4.

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

No schemes are currently planned for Control Period 5.

238 SRS H.90 Immingham and Killingholme Docks

Route specification description

Part of Route H Cross-Pennine, Yorks & Humber and North West, this SRS covers a 12 mile freight only network of lines serving the Humber Ports complex situated on the south bank of the Humber. The route links the docks complex and freight terminals at Killingholme, Immingham West and Immingham East with the passenger railway at Ulceby and with the South Humberside Main Line at Great Coates.

The following freight lines are collectively H.90:

 Ulceby North Junction to Humber Road Junction. o A two track railway of almost 5 miles. At Humber Road Junction two tracks diverge towards Immingham West Junction and Killingholme leaving a short single lead section before the track doubles towards Immingham East. o The busiest section amongst this freight network of lines is between Ulceby North Junction and Humber Road Junction and on the diverging route towards Immingham West. o Network Rail owns the route as far as Humber Road Junction.  105 mile post to Immingham East Junction. o There are two coal terminals and two major oil terminals in the vicinity of Humber Road Junction with a further oil terminal near Immingham East Junction.

239  Adjacent to the Humber International Terminal (Association of British Ports) to Killingholme 2m 70ch o Single track section of just over two miles leading to various freight terminals.

 Immingham East Junction to Pyewipe Road o Largely single track and known as the Grimsby Light Railway. This route experiences very little traffic but can be used occasionally as a diversionary route.  Marsh Lane Junction to Grimsby Docks o A mixture of double and single track serving Grimsby Docks. This route experiences very little traffic.  The following routes are owned by the Association of British Ports: o Humber Road Junction to Immingham West Junction/Simon Storage West and Humber International Terminal (Association of British Ports).This includes an automatic level crossing. o Humber Road Junction and 105 mile post o 106 mile 946 yards at Immingham East Junction towards the Eastern Jetty o Pyewipe Road to Great Coates at 108 miles 748 yards.

 There is a Traction Maintenance Depot near Immingham East used for stabling and servicing freight locomotives.

Freight traffic is subject to timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

240

Immingham and Killingholme Docks

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route Immingham and Killingholme Docks description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W12 W12 Increase gauge as appropriate in conjunction with the Third Party scheme

Signals Mix of Track Circuit Mix of Track Circuit Subject to the rollout Block and Absolute Block and Absolute programme of European Rail Traffic Management Block (with local Block (with local System (ERTMS). instructions). instructions).

Speed 20 mph 20 mph Raise line speed as appropriate in line with See Sectional infrastructure Appendix for characteristics and detailed speed capability of freight traffic profiles

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains 52 tpd Immingham West Junction to As per forecasts in As per per day Humber Road Junction in each direction the Strategic Freight forecasts in the Network Strategic 8tpd remaining routes in each direction Freight Network

60 tpd Humber Road Junction to Ulceby North Junction in each direction.

241

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 3 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 3

User: 29 There is an Automatic Level Crossing situated on Third Party land.

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project ELR Implementation Output change Notes Status Description Date

Humber Ports Freight gauge BRI1, BRI2, 2014 Gauge Freight In ECML (Gauge clearance KIL1,KIL2 , improvement gauge development Clearance) INW

Immingham East Signalling and PYE1/PYE2/ By December Renewal of In signal interlocking track renewal BRI2 2013 asset and development and track renewal and rationalisation rationalisation

Able UK Freight Capacity KIL1, KIL2 To be confirmed Capacity In proposed new improvements improvements development freight connection

Able UK New Capacity and KIL1,KIL2 To be confirmed Capacity In Freight run round performance improvements development facility at improvements Killingholme.

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

No schemes are currently planned for Control Period 5.

242 SRS H.91 Freight Through Routes

Route specification description

This SRS consists of the following subsections:

 Beighton Junction to Woodhouse Junction (BEW) o A two track railway linking the Sheffield to Worksop route with Barrow Hill and the Midland Main Line at Tapton Junction.  Brancliffe East Junction to Kirk Sandall Junction (BKS) o Double track for just over three miles as far as Dinnington Junction, then single track for 11.5 miles before there is a small element of double track before the line diverges towards Doncaster. The single track then extends almost 5 miles to Kirk Sandall Junction where it links up with the Doncaster to Brocklesby Junction route. The route between Brancliffe East Junction and Kirk Sandall Junction avoids Doncaster and is known as the South Yorkshire Joint Line. o There is a run round facility at St. Catherine’s Junction providing links to Doncaster Down and Up Yards.  Tapton Junction to Rotherham Masborough Station North Junction (CHR) o A double track line avoiding Sheffield although the junction at Masborough Station North is only single lead. The route provides a direct link between the Midland Main line and Rotherham / Aldwarke and is also a diversionary route for passenger services.

243 o The route has a loop at Barrow Hill, reception sidings and a Train Crew relief point. There are also routes diverging towards Bolsover, Markham Vale and Oxcroft, although these are currently out of use. (See Freight SRS H.98). The route also contains a Down Goods line at Treeton and an Up Goods loop at Canklow. At nearby Masborough Sorting Sidings South Junction there is DB Schenker freight site and a Train Crew Depot.  Carcroft Junction to Stainforth Junction (CJS) o Double track route providing a freight diversionary route between South Humberside and West Yorkshire. The busiest section of the route is between Stainforth Junction and Applehurst Junction where the line diverges towards the East Coast Main Line. (See Applehurst Junction to Joan Croft Junction below). The through route continues to Skellow Junction and then diverges towards Carcroft Junction and Adwick Junction. The route towards Carcroft Junction is double but with single leads at the north and south end. The route between Skellow Junction and Adwick Junction is described below.  Joan Croft Junction to Applehurst Junction (JCA) o Largely a double track route providing the main freight artery between the East Coast Main Line, South Yorkshire and the Humber Ports.  Skellow Junction to Adwick Junction (SKA) o A double track route providing a freight diversionary route between South Humberside and West Yorkshire. The junction at Adwick onto the main Doncaster to Leeds route is a single lead.  Ferrybridge North Junction to Knottingley West Junction (FKW) o A double track route.  Hexthorpe Junction to Bentley Junction to (Doncaster avoiding line) (HJB) o A double track route avoiding Doncaster.  Hare Park Junction to Crofton West Junction (HPC) o A double track route linking the East Coast Main Line with Crofton West Junction providing a passenger diversionary capability and a direct route to the Aire Valley power stations.  Healey Mills Yard (Wakefield) (HYM) o This is a DB Schenker lease site. An extensive but largely disused yard situated between the Down and Up main passenger lines between Wakefield and Huddersfield approximately four miles west of Wakefield. The site contains a Train Crew Relief Point and a disused Traction Maintenance Depot. A typical day sees up to seven trains in each direction using the main line between Thornhill LNW Junction and Horbury Junction that runs either siding of this yard. (Strategic Route Section H.09). Of these circa 50% will stop at Healey Mills for Train Crew relief purposes. Occasionally a freight train maybe stabled here.  Knottingley East Junction to Knottingley South Junction (KES) o A single chord link allowing freight traffic and in particularly coal trains to directly travel between Shaftholme and the Aire Valley power stations. There is also a connection to the Traction Maintenance Depot at Knottingley.  Knottingley West Junction to Shaftholme Junction (KWS) o A double track route allowing freight traffic to travel from the East Coast Main line at Shaftholme Junction to Knottingley and the Aire Valley Power Stations. The junction at Shaftholme is a single lead junction. Shaftholme Junction remodelling includes for a bridge

244 over the East Coast Main Line thereby providing a more direct link between the Humber Ports and the Aire Valley Power Stations.  Milford Junction to Gascoigne Wood Junction (MGW) o A double track route providing a key freight link between the East Coast Main Line via Hambleton and the Aire Valley Power Stations.  Normanton, Altofts Junction to Colton Junction (NOC) 15miles 220 yards to 20 miles 1606 yards) o A double track railway linking Castleford with Milford Junction used by freight to the Aire Valley Power Stations. There is also a connection to the Strategic Freight Site at Ledstone.  Pontefract East Junction to Ferrybridge South Junction (PEF) o A single chord linking the Wakefield area with the main line between Sheffield and York. The route is used by freight traffic serving the Aire Valley Power station at Ferrybridge.  St. James Junction to Bridge Junction Doncaster (SJB) o A single line chord linking South Yorkshire with the East Coast Main Line at Doncaster. The connection on to the East Coast Main Line faces south. This chord is used by a mixture of freight traffic.  Doncaster Low Ellers Curve Junction to Potteric Carr Junction (UDS) o A single lead chord diverging off the South Yorkshire Joint Line giving direct access to the Up freight yards at Doncaster. This route has neither automatic warning system (AWS) nor Train Protection Warning System (TPWS). Freight traffic is subject to Timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

The Signalling system in the table below is abbreviated as follows: Track Circuit Block - TCB Absolute Block - AB.

245 Beighton Junction to Woodhouse Junction (BEW)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN816 Beighton Junction to Woodhouse Junction description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W7 W7 W7 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 55 mph 55 mph 55 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

246

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 3 (Down) As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network 6 (Up)

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 1 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

247 Brancliffe East Junction to Kirk Sandall Junction (BKS)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN758 Brancliffe East Junction to Kirk Sandall Junction. description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6A / W7 W6A / W7 W6A / W7 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 25 25 25 Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

248

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 18 in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 1 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 8

249 Tapton Junction to Rotherham Masborough Station North Junction (CHR)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN806 Tapton Junction to Masborough Junction description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W9/W10/W12 W9/W10/W12 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 75 mph 75 mph 75 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

250

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 25 in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 1

251 Carcroft Junction to Stainforth Junction (CJS)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

LN842 Stainforth Junction to Adwick Junction & Line of route description LN846 Carcroft Junction to Skellow Junction

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W7/W8 W9/W10/W12 W9/W10/W12 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 50 mph 50 mph 50 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional 25 mph between 25 mph between 25 mph between Carcroft Appendix for Carcroft Junction to Carcroft Junction to Junction to Skellow Raise line speed as detailed speed Skellow Junction Skellow Junction Junction appropriate profiles

Electrification None None None

252

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 7 (Down) & 9 (Up) & 1 in As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day each direction respectively Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 3

User: 7

253 Joan Croft Junction to Applehurst Junction (JCA)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN844 Applehurst Loop description

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W9/W10/W12 W9/W10/W12 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 25 mph 25 mph 25 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

254

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 35 in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 2

255 Skellow Junction to Adwick Junction (SKA)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN842 Stainforth Junction to Adwick Junction description

Route 8/9 8/9 8/9 availability (RA)

Gauge W6A W9/W10/W12 W9/W10/W12 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 50 mph 50 mph 50 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

256

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 7 (Down) As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network 9 (Up)

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level As determined by Level Crossing policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 1

257 Ferrybridge North Junction to Knottingley West Junction (FKW)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN888 Shaftholme Junction to Ferrybridge North Junction description

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W10 W10 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 40 mph 40 mph 40 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

258

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 40 tpd in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings in this route.

259 Hexthorpe Junction to Bentley Junction to (Doncaster avoiding line) (HJB)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN766 Bentley Junction to Hexthorpe Junction (Doncaster Avoiding Line) description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W10 W10 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 50 mph 50 mph 50 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

260

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 11 in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings in this route.

261 Hare Park Junction to Crofton West Junction (HPC)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN848 Hare Park Junction to Crofton West Junction description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W9 W10/W12 W10/W12 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 55 mph 55 mph 55 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

262

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 18 in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 1

263 Healey Mills Yard (Wakefield) (HYM)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route Not shown description

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W6A W6A W6A Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 20 mph 20 mph 20 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

264

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 0 – 2 in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings in this route.

265 Knottingley East Junction to Knottingley South Junction (KES)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN894 Knottingley South Junction to Knottingley East Junction description

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 10 mph 10 mph 10 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

266

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 12 in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level As determined by Level Crossing policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings in this route.

267 Knottingley West Junction to Shaftholme Junction (KWS)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN888 Shaftholme Junction to Ferrybridge North Junction. description

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W6A W10 W10 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 60 mph 60 mph 60 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for speed profiles

Electrification None None None

268

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 15 in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 5 As determined by Level As determined by Level Crossing policy Crossing policy Automatic: 6

User: 20

269 Milford Junction to Gascoigne Wood Junction (MGW)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN804 Tapton Junction to Gascoigne Wood (via Sheffield) description

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W10 W10 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 25 mph 25 mph 25 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

270

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 24 tpd in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 1

271 Normanton, Altofts Junction to Colton Junction (NOC 15miles 220 yards to 20 miles 1606 yards)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN854 Hall Royd Junction to Skelton Junction description

Route 9 9 9 availability (RA)

Gauge W9 W10 W10 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 60 mph 60 mph 60 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

272

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 14 in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 2 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

273 Pontefract East Junction to Ferrybridge South Junction (PEF)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN892 Pontefract East Junction to Ferrybridge South Junction description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 15 mph 15 mph 15 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

274

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 12 Down As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network 14 Up

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings in this route.

275 St. James Junction to Bridge Junction Doncaster (SJB)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN832 Doncaster Bridge Junction to St. James Junction description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 20 mph 20 mph 20 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

276

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 6 in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings in this route.

277 Doncaster Low Ellers Curve Junction to Potteric Carr Junction (UDS)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN704 Low Ellers Curve description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W9 W9 W9 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

Speed 15 mph 15 mph 15 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

278

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 6 Down As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network 8 Up

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings in this route.

279 SRS H.98 Freight Trunk Routes

Route specification description

The following non electrified freight lines are collectively H.98 LNE. Whilst all routes are shown only those routes within Network Rail ownership and that appear in the Sectional Appendix and see regular freight use are shown in further detail.

 Alexandra Dock to Hessle Road Junction (ADH1/2), Hull Hessle Road Junction to Saltend (HJS) including King George Dock Hull (KGD) o A single track branch from Hessle Road Junction to the boundary with the Associated British Ports with a small section of double track approaching the above junction. Network Rail ownership extends from Hessle Road Junction at 0 miles 0 yards to 5 miles 1364 yards. See map below for further route information.  Attercliffe Goods Yard (AGY) o Two loops leading to a Private Siding / yard situated between Sheffield and Brightside. The siding / yard is served by one freight tpd.  Barrow Hill North (Goods Line) Junction to Seymour Junction (BAC2) & Elmton and Creswell Junction to Seymour Junction (BAC3) o Former single track section for just over a mile before it became double track leading from Barrow Hill North Junction to a number of former East Midlands collieries in the Bolsover/Seymour/Oxcroft area. Closed under Short Term Network Change.

280 o There is a Third Party proposal to develop a freight terminal at Markham Vale which will see part of the route between Barrow Hill North Junction / Foxlow Junction and Bolsover returned to an operational status. The route between Seymour Junction and Oxcroft Junction is closed under Short Term Network Change and is permanently closed between Oxcroft Junction and Elmton and Creswell.  Shepcote Lane East Junction to Broughton Lane Junction (BLJ) o Single track spur facing south west providing a link between the Woodburn Junction to Aldwarke main line and Tinsley yard. Also known as the S.W. curve. Closed under Short Term Network Change.  Bolsover Colliery (Seymour Junction to Bolsover) (BOC1) o Former single track route leading from the former Seymour Junction area to former East Midlands collieries. This route is closed under Short Term Network Change up to 7 miles 220 yards. There is a Third Party proposal to develop a freight terminal at Markham Vale which will see part of this route as far as 7 miles 220 yards returned to an operational status. The route beyond 7 miles 220 yards has recently been permanently closed.  Bowers Row Opencast (Castleford) (BOO) Network Rail ownership up to 6 mile post o Known as the Ledstone Branch. Currently out of use but recently required as a strategic freight site. The rest of the route is owned by the Local Authority.  Barlow Tip Branch (BTB) o Engineers test track but no booked freight traffic.  Brightside to Treeton Junction (Tinsley Yard) (BTJ) up to 159 miles 1672 yards o Brightside Junction (TJC2 162 miles 814 yards to Shepcote Lane West Junction (SEL 161m 528 yards) is closed. The rest of the route from Shepcote Lane as far as 159 miles 1672 yards is open but sees no or very little traffic. The remainder of the route towards Treeton is closed.  Clarborough Junction to Cottam Power Station (Torksey Branch) (TYB1 & CPS) o Double track from Clarborough Junction as far as the Network Rail boundary at 71 miles 1738 yards linking the power stations at Cottam with the main line at Clarborough Junction. The remainder of the route is within the power station boundary. The plants are owned by EDF and E-On UK. See map below for further route information.  Drax Power Station (DRA) o Two track balloon shaped loop with elements of bi directional working and a small single track section linking the power station with the Goole to Knottingley main line at Drax Branch Junction. The double track section between 0 miles 0 yards and 4 miles 352 yards is in Network Rail ownership. The rest of the route is within the Drax Group PLC complex. See map below for further route information.  Dewsbury East Junction to Dewsbury Railway Street (DRS1) o Short single track route leading to a freight terminal. Whilst it is operational there are currently no booked freight trains using this line. See map below for further route information.  Eggborough Power Station (EGG1) o Single track balloon shaped loop linking the power station with the Goole to Knottingley main line at Whitley Bridge Junction. The power station is operated by the EDF Group. The connection is within the Network Rail boundary and the gauge for the connection and approach lines is W8. There are 22 freight trains per day serving the power station.

281  Frickley Colliery Branch (FRC1) . This is a former single track line leading to the former South Yorkshire colliery. This route is closed.  Goole Docks Line (GDL) & Engine Shed Junction to Goole Docks (WAG3 73m 1144 yards to 74m 0 yards) o Single line leading from Goole to the yard and Goole Docks. Goole Yard is leased to DBS and the docks are owned by the Associated British Ports. The west end access from Engine Shed Junction sees no traffic as it is out of use. There are two trains per day in each direction from the docks complex towards Goole.  Harworth Colliery : Firbeck Junction to Harworth (HAC) o A single track line serving a former colliery and freight terminal. The route diverges off the South Yorkshire Joint Line at Firbeck Junction. This route is closed under Short Term Network Change  Hall Lane Junction to Foxlow Junction (HLF1/2) o A single track chord linking the former East Midlands coalfields with the Tapton Junction to Masborough Station North Junction main line at Foxlow Junction. This route is closed under Short Term Network Change.  Hunslet East Goods (Leeds) (HUE) o Situated one mile east of Leeds. The route comprised of a single line linking the DBS site at Hunslet East with the Leeds to York / Hull route at Neville Hill. See map below for further route information.  Ferrybridge Power Station (JMM) o A single balloon shaped loop linking the Scottish and Southern Energy power station with the Moorthorpe to York main line at Ferrybridge Power Station Junction. The connection to the power station is within Network Rail ownership with the remainder of the line owned by the Central Electricity Generating Board o 12 freight trains per day serve the power station.  Deepcar to Cleethorpes : Stocksbridge Line 33m 588 yards to 42m 745 yards (MAC3) o A single track line from Woodburn Junction serving the steel terminal at Stocksbridge. The Network Rail boundary extends from Woodburn Junction to 33 miles 440 yards. See map below for further route information.  Maltby Colliery Branch Junction to Maltby Colliery (MAM1/2) o A single line serving the colliery with a connection off the South Yorkshire Joint Line that links Worksop and Doncaster. Whilst there are no booked freight services, the line sees occasional use of between one and four trains per day in each direction. Only the connection to this site is within Network Rail ownership.  Manton Colliery Branch (MAN1/2) o Single track siding. See map below for further route information.  Monk Bretton Branch (MKB) and Oakenshaw South Junction to Crofton East Junction (OSC) o This double line diverges at Crofton East Junction and serves a freight facility at Monk Bretton. The double track route becomes a single track route at 181 miles 1584 yards at Oakenshaw South Junction. It is here that a single lead chord from Oakenshaw joins the

282 Monk Bretton branch. There is a loop at Monk Bretton. See map below for further route information.  Normanby Park Branch (formerly Scunthorpe West Junction to Normanby Park (NOP) o Situated approximately half a mile east of Scunthorpe, a single track branch linking the Roxby Gullet waste management freight terminal with the Doncaster to Brocklesby main line at Scunthorpe. There is also a connection to Flixborough Wharf Limited. See map below for further route information.  Oakenshaw South Junction to Oakenshaw Junction (OAJ) o A single track chord linking the Monk Bretton branch with Oakenshaw and Wakefield area. There are no booked freight services using this chord. See map below for further route information.  Oxcroft Junction to Oxcroft Opencast (OXO) o Former single track route leading from the former Seymour Junction area to a former UK coal opencast site. This route is closed under Short Term Network Change.  Hull Yard to Dairycoates (PHC) o Just over 3miles west of Hull a single track line diverges off the main line at Hessle East Junction to serve Hull freight yard and a freight terminal at Dairycoates. One train per day in each direction serves the freight terminal at Dairycoates. Only the connections are part of the Network Rail infrastructure.  Roundwood Chord Junction to Silverwood Colliery Line (RSC) o Situated near Aldwarke on the Sheffield to Doncaster / Leeds route. Consists of a series of sidings that act as an interchange point for an industrial line up to the former colliery and steel plant. No traffic currently uses this facility.  Santon Ore Branch (Scunthorpe) (SAN) o A single line serving the Foreign Ore terminal at Scunthorpe. See map below for further route information.  Scunthorpe, Trent Junction to Dawes Lane Junction (SCD) o A series of freight reception lines and sidings within a DBS lease site approximately half a mile east of Scunthorpe station.  Shepcote Lane West Junction to Tinsley South Junction (SEL) o Situated circa two and half miles south of Rotherham Central station this single lead chord provides a link from the Mexborough to Woodburn Junction main line to Tinsley Yard. See map below for further route information.  Seymour Colliery Branch (Barrow Hill) (SEY) o Former single track route leading from the former Seymour Junction area to a UK coal freight facility at Seymour. This route is closed under Short Term Network Change.  Shireoaks West Junction to Woodend Junction (SHW) o This single lead western goods chord provides a direct link between the Shirebrook main line and the Worksop to Sheffield main line and the South Yorkshire Joint Line towards Doncaster and South Humberside. See map below for further route information.  Skipton Middle Junction to Grassington (SKS1/2)

283 o A single track line of just over eight miles from Skipton to the freight terminal at Rylstone. The Network Rail boundary is at SKS2 6 miles 1100 yards with the remainder of the route owned by the freight terminal. See map below for further route information. o There is a proposal for the Privately Owned Embsay and Bolton Abbey Steam Railway to extend their railway towards Skipton with a link onto our infrastructure at the former Embsay Junction.  Spring Bank North Junction to Walton Street Junction (SPW) o A single track chord providing a direct link between the Hull Docks branch and the Hull to Bridlington route. There are no booked freight services over this chord. See map below for further route information.  Scunthorpe Yards (SSH) o Situated approximately half a mile east of Scunthorpe station on the upside of the Doncaster to Brocklesby main line. The yards feature Up and Down goods loops, reception line and a series of sidings. These sidings are outside the Network Rail boundary and provide a link to the Tata Steelworks complex. Up to 20 freight trains per day use this site to serve the various freight terminals and for train crew relief purposes.  Cudworth to Sandal and Walton (TJC3 175m 309 yards to 181m 320 yards) o This route is closed with the majority of the route outside of Network rail ownership.  Treeton North Junction to Catcliffe Junction (TNC) o This former two track route linked Tinsley Yard with the Tapton Junction to Masborough Station North Junction main line. This route is closed.  West Burton Power Station (WBC) o A single track balloon shaped loop linking the three plants at West Burton Power Station with the Sheffield to Lincoln/Gainsborough Central main line at West Burton East Junction and West Burton West Junction. Beyond the junction connections the route is within the power station boundary. 13 freight tpd serve this power station.  Westgate Branch (Rotherham) (WBH) o A single track serving a freight terminal near Rotherham with the Sheffield to Doncaster/Leeds main line. Currently this route sees no booked freight traffic. The connection to this site is within the Network Rail boundary. The rest forms part of a Private Siding.  Welbeck Branch (WBK) o This former route diverged of the Wakefield to Normanton main line at MVN2 49miles 1496 yards and served the former Welbeck colliery in Yorkshire. This route is closed.  Woodburn Junction to Mexborough Junction (WME) o A double track main line from Aldwarke Junction to Tinsley East Junction via Rotherham Central. From Tinsley East Junction to Woodburn Junction the route is single track although the junction at Woodburn Junction is double. The section of route between Tinsley South Junction and Rotherham Parkgate will see the introduction of a Tram Train passenger service (3tph in each direction) serving Sheffield, Rotherham Central and Rotherham Parkgate. A new connection at Tinsley South Junction will provide a direct link with the existing South Yorkshire Tram Network and the heavy rail network. A new turnback station platform is planned at the Rotherham Parkgate retail site. See map below for further route information.  St. Catherine Junction to Decoy South Junction (Doncaster) (YDS)

284 o A single lead chord diverging off the South Yorkshire Joint Line at Low Ellers Curve Junction to the Great Northern Great Eastern Joint Line (GN&GE) and the Doncaster Down Yard complex. See map below for further route information.

The Signalling system in the table below is abbreviated as follows: Track Circuit Block - TCB Absolute Block - AB.

Alexandra Dock to Hessle Road Junction (ADH1/2), Hull Hessle Road Junction to Saltend (HJS) including King George Dock Hull (KGD)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN916 Hessle Road to Saltend (0m 0yards to 5m 1364 yards) description

Route 7/8 7/8 7/8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W10/12 W10/12

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed 30 mph 30 mph 30 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

285

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 9 trains in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings on this route.

286 Clarborough Junction to Cottam Power Station (Torksey Branch) (TYB1 & CPS)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN746 Cottam Power Station Branch 68m 704 yards to 71m 1738 yards description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W7 W7 W7 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed Predominantly 40mph Predominantly 40mph Predominantly 40mph Up. Raise line speed as Up. Down line varies Up. Down line varies Down line varies between appropriate See Sectional between 20 and 40mph between 20 and 40mph 20 and 40mph Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

287

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 12 trains serve the Power As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Station Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 2

User: 3

288 Drax Power Station (DRA)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN896 Drax Power Station Branch 0m 0yards to 4m 352yards description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS)

Speed Down 45mph, Up Down 45mph, Up Down 45mph, Up 55mph Raise line speed as 55mph 55mph appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

289

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 35 trains serve the Power As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Station Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level As determined by Level Crossing policy Crossing policy Automatic: 2

User: 10

290 Dewsbury East Junction to Dewsbury Railway Street (DRS1)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN864 Dewsbury Railway Street Branch description

Route 6 6 6 availability (RA)

Gauge W6A W6A W6A Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals One train working where One train working Subject to rollout a staff is not provided where a staff is not programme of European Rail Traffic Management provided System (ERTMS).

Speed 20 mph 20 mph 20 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

291

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Nil As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings on this route.

292 Hunslet East Goods (Leeds) (HUE)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN900 Neville Hill West Junction to Hunslet East description

Route 10 10 10 availability (RA)

Gauge W6A W6A W6A Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed 20 mph 20 mph 20 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

293

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 1 train in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings in this route.

294

Deepcar to Cleethorpes: Stocksbridge Line 33m 588 yards to 42m 745 yards (MAC3)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN750 Woodburn Junction to Deepcar description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6A W6A W6A Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals One train working where One train working Subject to rollout a staff is not provided. where a staff is not programme of European Rail Traffic Management provided. System (ERTMS).

Speed 30mph 30mph 30mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

295

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 1 train in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 2

296 Manton Colliery Branch (MAN1/2)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Manton Wood Junction to Manton Wood Headshunt (Manton Colliery Line of route description Branch)

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6A W6A W6A Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed 5 mph 5mph 5mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

297

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 3 tpd in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings in this route.

298 Monk Bretton Branch (MKB) and Oakenshaw South Junction to Crofton East Junction (OSC)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN886 Monk Bretton Loop to Crofton East Junction description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6A W6A W6A Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals One Train Working One Train Working Subject to rollout where a staff is not where a staff is not programme of European Rail Traffic Management provided. provided. System (ERTMS).

Speed 40 mph Oakenshaw 40 mph Oakenshaw 40 mph Oakenshaw Raise line speed as South Junction to Monk South Junction to Monk South Junction to Monk appropriate See Sectional Bretton, 30mph Crofton Bretton, 30mph Crofton Bretton, 30mph Crofton Appendix for East Junction to East Junction to East Junction to detailed speed Oakenshaw South Oakenshaw South Oakenshaw South profiles Junction Junction Junction

Electrification None None None

299

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 2-3 trains per week in each As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day direction Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level As determined by Level Crossing policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings in this route.

300 Normanby Park Branch (formerly Scunthorpe West Junction to Normanby Park (NOP)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN756 Scunthorpe Trent Junction to Roxby description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals One Train Working One Train Working Subject to rollout where a staff is where a staff is programme of European Rail Traffic Management provided. provided. System (ERTMS).

Speed 20 mph 20 mph 20 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

301

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 3 trains in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 1

User: 3

302 Oakenshaw South Junction to Oakenshaw Junction (OAJ)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN884 Oakenshaw South Junction to Oakenshaw Junction description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6A W6A W6A Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed 20 mph 20 mph 20 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

303

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Nil. As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 2

304 Santon Ore Branch (Scunthorpe) (SAN)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN754 Scunthorpe Foreign Ore Branch description

Route 10 10 10 availability (RA)

Gauge W6A W6A W6A Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed 15 mph 15 mph 15 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

305

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 14 in each direction. As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings in this route.

306 Shepcote Lane West Junction to Tinsley South Junction (SEL)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN810 Shepcote Lane West Junction to Tinsley South Junction description

Route 10 10 10 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W8 W8 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed 30 mph 30 mph 30 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

307

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 2 in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings in this route.

308 Shireoaks West Junction to Woodend Junction (SHW)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN782 Woodend Junction to Shireoaks West Junction description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6A W6A W6A Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed 20 mph 20 mph 20 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

309

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 6 in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings in this route.

310 Skipton Middle Junction to Grassington (SKS1/2)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN930 Skipton Middle Junction to Rylstone description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6A W6A W6A Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals One Train Working One Train Working Subject to rollout where a staff is not where a staff is not programme of European Rail Traffic Management provided. provided. System (ERTMS).

Speed 15 mph 15 mph 15 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

311

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 3 trains in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 1 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 12

312 Spring Bank North Junction to Walton Street Junction (SPW)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN918 Springbank North Junction to Walton Street Junction description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6A W6A W6A Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed 25 mph 25 mph 25 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

313

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of Nil As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings in this route.

314 Woodburn Junction to Mexborough Junction (WME)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Line of route LN830 Aldwarke Junction to Woodburn Junction description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W8 W10 W10 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed Varies between 30mph Varies between 30mph Varies between 30mph Raise line speed as and 55mph and 55mph and 55mph appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None WME 2m 484 yards WME 2m 484 yards to Subject to Tram to circa 6m 0 yards, circa 6m 0 yards, 750 Train proposal. 750 DC DC

315

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 6 in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network 3 passenger trains per hour in each direction proposed between Rotherham circa 6 mile post and Tinsley South Junction 2 miles 484 yards.

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 3

316 St. Catherine Junction to Decoy South Junction (Doncaster) (YDS)

Route information overview Information Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

LN762 St. Catherine’s Junction to Decoy South Junction (St. Catherine’s Line of route description Curve)

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W9 W9 W9 Increase gauge as appropriate

Signals TCB TCB Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed 25 mph 25 mph 25 mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

317

Freight trains (trains per day) Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Number of 33 trains in each direction As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years level crossing Number of level crossings Number of level crossings Number of level crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by Level Crossing As determined by Level policy Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0 There are no level crossings in this route.

318 SRS H.99 Other Freight Routes

Geographic map showing H.99 Other Freight Routes

Route specification description

The following Strategic Route Sections (SRS) are those that are freight only and other empty coaching stock train routes accessed via Strategic Route H. This document outlines each SRS identified and outlines the main characteristics of the route concerned. The order in which these routes are described is that order borne by the associated Strategic Route Section within Route H from which they are accessed. For example, the freight only line between Sandbach and Northwich via Middlewich is accessed at the Sandbach end from SRS H.22 Manchester Piccadilly to Crewe. Although this example is also accessed from SRS H.30 Guide Bridge and Stockport to Mouldsworth, it will be described when considering the lowest numbered SRS.

Freight traffic is subject to timetable fluctuations and is based on average number of trains.

319 SRS H.22 Manchester Piccadilly to Crewe

Sydney Bridge (former site of) – Sandbach – Manchester Independent Lines Accessed from Crewe Basford Hall or Salop Goods Junction, these two lines the Down or Up Independent Lines emerge via the grade separated tunnel at the north of Crewe either side of the Down and Up Wilmslow Lines. With a maximum line speed of 60 mph reducing to 50mph at 162m 17ch, they run to Sandbach South Junction where they converge with the Wilmslow Lines via 25mph crossovers. The route is AC Over Head Electrified.

The principle traffic flow along this route is from Crewe Basford Hall and beyond to Manchester’s Trafford Park freight terminal.

Route information overview Information Current + 10years + 30 years Notes

Line of route NW5001Crewe North junction to Manchester Piccadilly description

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge W9 and 10 W9 and 10 W9 and 10

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block. Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS).

Speed 60 (50) mph 60 (50) mph 60 (50) mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification AC Over Head 25 KV AC Over Head 25 KV AC Over Head 25 KV

Freight trains (trains per day) Days Of week Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Route section Sydney Bridge Junction (former site of) to Sandbach South Junction

Number of Up to 30 - 35 trains per day As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day Up and Down Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

320

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years number Notes of level crossings level crossings of level crossings crossing

Supervised: 0 As recommended by As recommended by Level Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

There are no level crossings in this route.

Sandbach North Junction to Northwich West Junction NW3029 Accessed at Sandbach South Junction from the south only via the Up and Down Platform Line and running via Middlewich to Northwich West Junction forming a triangle with SRS H.30 the unelectrified route is approximately eight and a half miles long.

The route is caters for infrequent services for the ‘Albion Inorganic Sidings via Up and Down Middlewich line which diverges at Sandbach North Junction from the Up Middlewich Branch. Both lines are 15 mph for their approximate three quarter mile length.

At Elworth Junction the Up and Down Middlewich Branch is a single track with access to British Salt accessed from the Sandbach direction only. The route is maximum 20mph through to Northwich West Junction, with the loop forming the Down Middlewich Loop and Up Middlewich Loop at Middlewich accessed via 20mph crossovers.

The route was formally used in the early WCRM upgrade period for diversions for the Chester direction, however the route is no longer maintained for passenger running.

Route information overview Information Current + 10years + 30 years Notes

Line of route NW3029 Sandbach North junction to Northwich West Junction description

Route availability (RA) RA8 RA8 RA8

Gauge W7 W7 W7

Signals Track Circuit Block Track Circuit Block Subject to rollout programme of European Rail Traffic Management System

321 Speed 20 (15) mph 20 (15) mph 20 (15) mph Raise line speed as appropriate See Sectional Appendix for detailed speed profiles

Electrification None None None

Freight trains (trains per day) Days Of week Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

Route section Sandbach North junction to Northwich West Junction

Number of Less than one train per day As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the trains per day in each direction. Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

Level crossings on route Description Current number of level + 10 Years number of + 30 Years number Notes of level crossings level crossings of level crossings crossing

Supervised: 0 As recommended by As recommended by Level Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0

User: 0

There are no level crossings in this route.

SRS H.24 Deansgate to Allerton NW6003

Trafford Park Freightliner Terminal Accessed from Trafford Park West Junction, a 15 mph crossover the various parts of the Trafford Park Terminal are available. Although the whole facility is not electrified, the connections and main reception roads are AC Over Head 25 KV Electrified. There is no eastern direction access or egress.

There is one path most hours timetabled in and out of the facility which caters for service operated principally by Freightliner and DBS. Freight forecasts in terms of commodity tonnage growth suggest this will increase to two paths per hour from 2019. The facility accepts RA8, W9 and W10.

322 SRS H.30 Guide Bridge Junction and Stockport to Mouldsworth NW3023

Partington Line Branch for Shell Oil Accessed from SRS H.30 at Skelton Junction, this line is now out of use.

Winnington Branch- Brunner Mond Oakleigh Sidings (Chemicals) NW3025 TCB signalling from Greenbank SB this non electrified branch is accessed form either direction at Hartford North and East Junctions merging to a single line then into a separate reception and departure roads. The total facility is approximately one mile long and is diesel only. Access is at 15mph off the main line via both chords to the single line.

Hartford CLC/West Coast Main Line Chord NW3033 Accessed either from the West Coast or from Hartford CLC Junction on SRS.30 NW3023, the up and down branch merges into a single chord linking the West Coast Main Line all at 15 mph. Signalling is TCB from Greenbank, the route is AC Overhead Electrified 25 KV only as a run out from the WCML.

The route is used for services accessing the north Cheshire and south Manchester area via this SRS and also Network Rail Network Trains for engineering works.

SRS H.32 Blackpool North Branch NW4005

Burn Naze Branch NW4009 This branch accessed at Poulton-Le-Fylde is an unelectrified single goods line with short loop. Although formerly a passenger two tack railway the route was last used in connection with services for the Burn Haze Power Station.

At the time of compilation of this document (August 2011), the route is temporarily out of use with a Network Change proposal to make this closure permanent.

Blackpool Carriage Sidings (North West) These sidings cater manly for Northern Rail diesel rolling stock operating the Barrow, Blackpool North and Blackpool South services. There is also some TransPennine Express rolling stock stabled here.

Controlled by Blackpool North No 2 via Blackpool North Power GF (15mph) and Blackpool North No 2, No1 siding crossovers to either the Down Main for platforms 1-3 or the UP Main for platform 4-8.

323 SRS H.33 Edge Hill to Manchester Victoria (Via Earlestown) and to Wigan NW2015

Bootle Branch NW2027/9 This diesel only two track route linking SRSH33 with the Liverpool and Alexandra docks, via the Bootle extension line, is now accessed from the easterly direction along H.33 via the recently reinstated Olive Mount Chord. The period between the closure and reinstatement of this chord, services were required to run into Edge Hill, run round and then travel via Bootle Branch Junction onto the route, which is still available.

The Bootle branch is in total six miles in length running radially around the city centre to the docks. There are three tunnels along the route ranging from 288 to 339 yards as well as a number of smaller structures. This two track branch is a 20mph maximum speed, TCB from Edge Hill SB. At the NWR limits into the docks the speed reduces to 10mph.

This route services containers and other commodities to and from Liverpool docks.

Pilkington Glass Oil Sidings (North West) After SRS H.33 diverges at Huyton Junction, via the route section via St Helens, these sidings can be accessed close to Pilkington viaduct, via the Down Goods Loop. The route includes a short loop and run round facility before opening out into the Ravenhead works to receive the Oil service for Pilkington Glass.

St Helens Sutton Oak Chemical Branch via Ravenhead Junction NW2025 This route is accessed immediately south of St Helens from and to the north direction and is no longer used.

Ince Moss Goods Branch NW1025 This two track part AC Overhead Electrified section of route leads from the currently diesel only SRS H.33 St Helens Branch to the West Coast Main Line to and from the south via Goods Lines. The electrification is the run out associated with the WCML route. Line speed is 20 mph and is TCB controlled from Warrington PSB

It s accessed on SRS H.33 a single lead at Ince Moss Junction and is used to cater for freight services in the St Helens and Liverpool area.

Up and Down Lowton Branch NW1021 This route links with the Chat Moss or SRS H.33 with the West Coast Main Line at Golborne services between Manchester and Wigan. This route is not freight only. It is used for diversions and for passenger services during engineering on other routes.

The route is Over Head AC 25 KV, TCB controlled from Warrington PSB with a 20 mph line speed.

Up Goods Loop – Eccles NW2015 Accessed from SRS H.33 at Eccles this diesel only lop forms a passing loop for services in perturbation or regulated to provide suitable margins before accessing the onward route through Manchester.

The 40 mph loop also provides access the Waste Terminal NW2017 via the 15 mph Up and Down Waste Branch

SRS H.10 Manchester Victoria – Stalybridge and Heaton Lodge

Castleton to Bolton Line NW7005 Accessed at Castleton South Junction, this diesel only line runs for three quarters of a mile under Network Rail control to the boundary with the East Lancs. Railway Company.

324 SRS I.04 Worksop/Chesterfield – Nottingham

Geographic map showing I.04 Worksop/Chesterfield – Nottingham

Route specification description

The lines between Worksop and Nottingham and between Chesterfield and Nottingham form part of Route I London and East Midlands. This secondary route is basically two track along its 84km with a four track section between Trowell Junction and Pye Bridge Junction and single track between Bulwell and Kirkby-in-Ashfield. It has 13 stations, typically consisting of two platforms with the exception of those on the single track section which have one platform. A third platform is provided at Mansfield Woodhouse which forms a turnback bay. There are 249 bridges along this route one of which is the listed Mansfield Viaduct.

Unusually, between Bulwell and Hucknall the formation is shared with the Nottingham Express Transit (NET) tramway electrified at 750v DC, although the Network Rail and NET parallel single tracks are owned and operated independently of each other.

This route links South Yorkshire and north Nottinghamshire with the city of Nottingham and carries the Norwich – Liverpool and Nottingham – Leeds interurban services as well as the Robin Hood line local suburban services in the Nottingham – Worksop corridor. Both the Norwich – Liverpool and the Robin Hood line services have shown strong growth in recent years and have proved highly successful in rebuilding the passenger market for rail in areas where for many years there had been little or no presence. This SRS also supports various freight operations.

Connections to private sidings serving coal disposal points exist at Codnor Park (Forge & Monument) and Doe Hill and to the heritage Midland Railway Centre, also at Codnor Park.

325 Historically there had been problems of poor performance on the Nottingham – Worksop line but matters have significantly improved lately as a result of small scale linespeed and signalling improvements recently completed in the corridor.

Route information overview Information Current + 10 years + 30 years Notes

Line of route Mansfield Junction to Mansfield Junction to Mansfield Junction description Trowell Junction Trowell Junction to Trowell Junction

Section start Mansfield Junction Mansfield Junction Mansfield Junction

Section end Trowell Junction Trowell Junction Trowell Junction

Line of route Trent East Junction Trent East Junction Trent East Junction description to Clay Cross North to Clay Cross North to Clay Cross North Junction Junction Junction

Section start Trowell South Trowell South Trowell South Junction Junction Junction

Section end Clay Cross North Clay Cross North Clay Cross North Junction Junction Junction

Line of route Radford Junction to Radford Junction to Radford Junction to description Kirkby Lane End Kirkby Lane End Kirkby Lane End Junction Junction Junction

Section start Radford Junction Radford Junction Radford Junction

Section end Kirkby Lane End Kirkby Lane End Kirkby Lane End Junction Junction Junction

Line of route Codnor Park Junction Codnor Park Codnor Park description to Shirebrook Junction to Junction to Junction Shirebrook Junction Shirebrook Junction

Section start Kirkby Lane End Kirkby Lane End Kirkby Lane End Junction Junction Junction

Section end Mansfield Mansfield Mansfield Woodhouse Woodhouse Woodhouse

Line of route Mansfield Mansfield Mansfield description Woodhouse to Woodhouse to Woodhouse to Shireoaks East Shireoaks East Shireoaks East Junction Junction Junction

326 Section start Mansfield Mansfield Mansfield Woodhouse Woodhouse Woodhouse

Section end Shireoaks East Shireoaks East Shireoaks East Junction Junction Junction

Route information overview Line of route Woodend Junction to Woodend Junction to Woodend Junction description Shireoaks West Shireoaks West to Shireoaks West Junction Junction Junction

Section start Woodend Junction Woodend Junction Woodend Junction

Section end Shireoaks West Shireoaks West Shireoaks West Junction Junction Junction

Route 7,8 7,8 7,8 availability (RA)

Gauge W6,W8 Trowell Jn – Clay Trowell Jn – Clay Cross W10/12. Cross W10/12. Remainder as current. Remainder as current

Signals A mixture of track Track circuit block European Rail Subject to the roll-out circuit block with some Traffic Management programme for ERTMS absolute block System (ERTMS) on sections the Erewash Valley line only

Speed Various speeds to Linespeed on fast lines Raise the lower Linespeed improvements on maximum normal increased to 90mph on speeds along the the Erewash Valley line are permitted linespeed of See Sectional the Erewash Valley route to the in development for CP4 as 80 mph on the Appendix for Erewash Valley and line and to 75mph on maximum linespeed recommended in the East detailed speed 75mph on the the Nottingham to of the route where Midlands Route Utilisation profiles Nottingham to Worksop line, where the rolling stock can Strategy (RUS). A third Workshop line rolling stock can take take advantage of party funded scheme is in advantage of the the higher speed development to improve the higher speed. linespeed on the Nottingham to Worksop line.

Electrified Non-electrified OHL Trowell Junction See Network RUS: – Clay Cross Electrification. Electrification of the Trowell Junction – Clay Cross section is an option in the MML Electrification Programme under development for CP5

327

Passenger train service level (trains per hour) Days of week Current + 10 years + 30 years Notes

Journey and Clay Cross South Reduced by ½ minute Reduce the journey CP4 scheme in typical Junction to Mansfield in each direction time of interurban development to improve the journey time Junction between Trent East and local services as linespeeds between Trent Junction and Clay low as possible in East Junction and Clay 29 minutes Cross North Junction line with linespeed Cross North Junction for local and interurban improvements and Shireoaks East services changes in rolling Junction to Mansfield stock Junction

60 minutes

No. of trains 1 LDHS interurban 1 LDHS interurban 1 LDHS interurban 1 Leeds – Nottingham per hour service 1 Liverpool – Norwich 3 local 3 local 3 local service

1 Worksop – Nottingham 1 Mansfield Woodhouse – Nottingham

Freight trains (trains per day) Days of week Current + 10 years + 30 years Notes

No. of trains 7 As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in per day* Strategic Freight the Strategic Freight Network Network

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday

Level crossings on route Description Current + 10 years + 30 years Notes of level crossing No. of level crossings No. of level crossings No. of level crossings

Supervised 6 As determined by level As determined by crossing policy level crossing policy Automatic 8

User 18

328 Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of Control Period 4 (2009 - 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 - 2014) Project Project description ELR Implementation Output change Status date

Robin Hood Signalling renewals RAC 2011 Renewed asset In development Line recontrol PBS2 PBS3

Whitwell Removal of tunnel PSE 2012 Third party In development Tunnel development

Hope Valley to Development work to TCC 2014 Improved capacity In development London freight examine facilities train required to lengthening accommodate longer and heavier freight trains

Nottingham to Journey time TCC 2014 Improved journey In development Sheffield improvement MJT2 time linespeed RAC improvements MJT1

Robin Hood Development work for PBS3 2014 Improve train In development Line (North) line speed increases PSE performance Line Speed between Mansfield Improvements Woodhouse and Shireoak East Junction

Proposed infrastructure investment in Control Period 5 (2014 - 2019)

No schemes currently planned for Control Period 5.

329 SRS I.08 Skegness – Grantham

Geographic map showing I.08 Skegness – Grantham

Route specification description

The corridor between Skegness and Grantham is part of Route I, London and East Midlands. This route is designated rural is a mainly two track railway with some single track sections along its 90km length. There are 11 stations and 159 bridges.

Skegness station at the easterly point of this SRS has six platforms; Sleaford station has three and remainder of the station two platforms.

The main market for this route is the hourly passenger service between Nottingham and Skegness whilst there is some freight activity to and from Boston Docks. Passenger traffic is characterised by heavy demand during the summer months.

Linespeeds are relatively low, well below the maximum speed capability of the rolling stock used, and as such the aspiration exists for linespeed improvements to allow faster journey times.

This particular service has been designated a Community Rail Service by the Department of Transport under the aegis of the Poacher Line Community Rail Partnership.

There are listed buildings within the environs of the station at Sleaford, part of which is also in a Conservation Area. Heckington and Wainfleet stations are both in Conservation Areas, whilst West Street Junction signal box (Boston) is listed.

330

Route information overview Information Current + 10 years + 30 years Notes

Line of route Allington West Allington West Allington West description Junction to Skegness Junction to Skegness Junction to Skegness

Section start Allington West Allington West Allington West Junction Junction Junction

Section end Skegness Skegness Skegness

Line of route Allington East Allington East Allington East description Junction to Allington Junction to Allington Junction to Allington North Junction North Junction North Junction

Section start Allington East Allington East Allington East Junction Junction Junction

Section end Allington North Allington North Allington North Junction Junction Junction

Route 7,8,10 availability (RA)

Gauge W6, W8 W6, W8 W6,W8

Average 720417 +0%-10% +0%-10% EMGTPA Tonnage

Signals A mixture of absolute Track circuit block European Rail Traffic Subject to the roll-out block with some track Management System programme for European circuit block sections Rail Traffic Management System (ERTMS)

Speed Maximum Normal Raise the linespeed to Raise the lower speeds Permitted linespeed 75mph to reflect the along the route to the 50mph maximum speed of the maximum linespeed of majority of the rolling the route where the stock operating on the rolling stock can take route advantage of the higher speed

Electrified non electrified non electrified non electrified

331

Passenger train service level (trains per hour) Days of week Current + 10 years + 30 years Notes

Journey and Nottingham Branch Junction to Nottingham Branch Nottingham Branch typical Skegness Junction to Junction to Skegness journey time Skegness 90 minutes Reduce journey time of Reduce journey time local services as low as of local services as possible in line with low as possible in linespeed improvements line with linespeed and changes in rolling stock improvements and changes in rolling stock

No. of trains 1 local (supplemented by 1 local 1 local (supplemented by Nottingham - per hour additional trains during the (supplemented by additional trains during the Skegness summer) additional trains summer)

during the summer)

Freight trains (trains per day) Days of week Current + 10 years + 30 years Notes

No. of trains 1 As per forecasts in the As per forecasts in the per day* Strategic Freight Network Strategic Freight Network

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday

332

Level crossings on route Description Current + 10 years + 30 years Notes of level crossing No. of level crossings No. of level crossings No. of level crossings

Supervised 14 As determined by Level As determined by Crossing policy Level Crossing policy Automatic 32

User 89

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 - 2014)

Planned infrastructure investment in remainder of CP4 (2009 – 2014) Project Project description ELR Implementation Output change Status date

Nottingham to Development works to ABE1 2014 Improve journey In development Skegness identify linespeed ACD times improvements GRS1 GRS2 GRS3 GRS4

National Enhancements to improve GRS4 2014 Improve station In development Station station facilities facilities Improvement Programme at Skegness

Proposed infrastructure investment in CP5 (2014 - 2019)

No schemes currently planned for Control Period 5.

333 SRS I.99 Other Freight Lines

Geographic map showing I.99 Other Freight Lines

Route specificationn description

The following freight lines are collectively I.99

 Shirebrook Junction to High Marnham (including the branch lines for Welbeck/Thoresby and Bevercotes Collieries)

The line is accessed from the Nottingham to Worksop line at Shirebrook Junction and extends for 17 miles to High Marnham. The section from Shirebrook Junction to Boughton Junction is two track, with single track extending to the former power station at High Marnham. Between Shirebrook Junction and Thoresby Colliery Junction the line continues to provide access for freight flows to the collieries along the route at Welbeck and Thoresby, although there has been no traffic to Welbeck Colliery for the last few years. The section of line beyond Thoresby Junction, including part of the single line to the former Bevercotes Colliery, now forms the Rail Innovation and Development Centre (RIDC) and is used for testing new and modified rail vehicles and infrastructure systems before roll out on to the network. The remainder of the Bevercotes Colliery branch remains closed. The RIDC is currently carrying out works to re-instate the sidings at Boughton Junction and Tuxford. Additional sidings will be provided at High Marnham.

334  Branch line for Colwick Oil Terminal

This branch line is accessed from the Nottingham to Grantham line at Rectory Junction. At Rectory Junction, access is provided along a half mile section of track to the north of the main line to the Oil Terminal at Colwick. The terminal is currently served by two trains per day.

 Corby Branch (not shown on the map)

This branch is accessed from the single track Kettering to Manton line at Corby North Junction and extends along two separate bi-directional tracks to the Corby Automotive Terminal and Corby Works (steel terminal) respectively. The branch sees regular flows of both automotive traffic from Europe and scrap metal traffic from South Wales to the two terminals.

The freight lines below have been closed or are very rarely used and are not shown on the map:

 Avenue Coking Plant Branch  Bestwood Park Junction to Calverton Colliery  Clipstone West to Clipstone South  Denby lines  Rufford Colliery Junction to Rufford  Ruddington Chord  Gedling Colliery  Cotgrave Colliery

Shirebrook Junction to High Marnham (including the branch lines for Welbeck/Thoresby and Bevercotes Collieries)

Route information overview Information Current + 10years + 30 years Notes

Line of route LN772: Warsop Jn to Shirebrook Junction description LN784: High Marnham to Shirebrook East Junction

LN786: Bevercotes Colliery Branch

LN788: Thoresby Colliery Branch

LN802: Welbeck Colliery Branch

Route 7,8,9 7,8,9 7,8,9 availability

Gauge 6 6 6

Signals Track circuit block Track circuit block Track circuit block one train working where staff is not provided on branch lines

335 Speed Various speeds to Raise the lower Raise the lower A short section of maximum permitted speeds along the speeds along the route track within the See Sectional linespeed of 50mph route to the to the maximum RIDC is to have Appendix for maximum linespeed linespeed of the route the linespeed speed profiles of the route where where the rolling stock increase to 75mph the rolling stock can can take advantage of for testing take advantage of the higher speed purposes. the higher speed

Electrification Non-electrified Non-electrified Non-electrified

Freight trains (trains per day) Days Of week Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains 2 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the per day* the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight Network Network

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes level crossing No. of level No. of level No. of level crossings crossings crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by As determined by Level Crossing Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0 policy

User: 16

Corby Branch

Route information overview Information Current + 10years + 30 years Notes

Line of route LN3605: Corby BSC Works to Corby North description LN3610: Corby Automotive Terminal to Corby North

Route 8 8 8 availability (RA)

Gauge 6 6 6

336 Signals Track circuit block to Track circuit block to Track circuit block to Corby BSC Works Corby BSC Works Corby BSC Works and and one train working and one train one train working where staff is not working where staff where staff is not provided to Corby is not provided to provided to Corby Automotive Terminal Corby Automotive Automotive Terminal Terminal

Speed Various speeds to Raise the lower Raise the lower maximum permitted speeds along the speeds along the route See Sectional linespeed of 15mph route to the to the maximum Appendix for maximum linespeed linespeed of the route speed profiles of the route where where the rolling stock the rolling stock can can take advantage of take advantage of the higher speed the higher speed

Electrification Non-electrified Non-electrified Non-electrified

Freight trains (trains per day) Days Of week Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes

No. of trains 2 As per forecasts in As per forecasts in the per day the Strategic Freight Strategic Freight Network Network

*Trains in a single direction on an average weekday

Level crossings on route Description of Current + 10 Years + 30 Years Notes level crossing No. of level No. of level No. of level crossings crossings crossings

Supervised: 0 As determined by As determined by Level Crossing Level Crossing policy Automatic: 0 policy

User: 0

337

Network Rail Kings Place 90 York Way London N1 9AG Tel: 020 3356 9595